JP2017104258A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent deterioration in taste of a game.SOLUTION: Game control means (a game control unit 100) determines whether game balls entering a special variable winning device in an initial round out of a plurality of rounds when the special variable winning device is opened, flows in a specific area or not. Further, special results include a plurality of types and, according to a type of a special result, the game control means selects any of a first execution mode, and a second execution modes, where game balls are more prone to enter the specific area than that in the first execution mode and the execution period thereof is longer than that of the first execution mode, as execution mode of the initial round. In the first execution mode, performance control means (a performance control unit 300) for controlling a game performance executes a fanfare performance of a predetermined prescribed length across a period from a start of the special game state to a start of a second round, and, in the second execution mode, after executing the fanfare performance, executes a performance according to the initial round.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 99

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening provided in the game area (start prize) ) Is variably displayed, and when the result of the variably displayed game becomes a special result, a special game state is opened in which the special variable winning device is opened. In addition, the special variation winning device includes a probability variation operating region and a mechanism capable of converting the game ball into a state where the game ball can flow into the probability variation operation region and a state where the game ball cannot flow into the probability variation operation region. A high probability state is generated based on the inflow.

JP 2014-104204 A

  In such a gaming machine, if the ease of inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region is different, it is difficult to inflow into the probability variation operation region if the presentation is performed in accordance with the opening mode of the special variable prize winning device. Something will be recognized by the player, and interest may be reduced. An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
In the special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won, and a special variable winning device including a specific area into which the game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
Based on the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flowing into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area is displayed after the end of the special game state. Can occur,
Among a plurality of rounds that open the special variable winning device, it is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the first round flows into the specific area,
There are a plurality of types of special results, and according to the type of the special results, the first round of execution as the mode of execution of the first round, and the inflow of game balls to the specific area more than the first mode of execution. Selecting one of the second execution modes that is easy and has an execution period longer than the first execution mode;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
In the case of the first execution mode, a fanfare effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of the second round is executed,
In the second execution mode, after the fanfare effect is executed, the effect corresponding to the first round is executed.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obscure a period during which it is difficult to enter the specific area due to the fanfare effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The game control means includes
In any of the first execution mode and the second execution mode, the special variation winning device is configured to be opened for a predetermined opening time in a period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed,
The opening of the special variable winning device during the period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed has the same opening time in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode, and the first execution mode and the The time from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening is different in the second execution mode.

  According to the invention described in claim 2, it is possible for a player who continues to play the gaming machine to determine whether or not it is difficult to flow into the specific area. It is possible to have an interest in determining whether it is difficult to enter the game, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The invention according to claim 3
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
In the special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won, and a special variable winning device including a specific area into which the game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
Based on the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flowing into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area is displayed after the end of the special game state. Can occur,
Among the multiple rounds that open the special variable winning device, it is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the final round flows into the specific area,
There are a plurality of types of special results, and according to the type of the special results, as the execution mode of the final round, the third execution mode and the inflow of game balls to the specific area than the third execution mode are included. Select one of the fourth execution modes that is easy and has an execution period longer than the third execution mode,
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
When the final round is the third execution mode,
Performing an ending effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a period from the end of the round immediately before the final round to the end of the special gaming state,
When the final round is the fourth execution mode, the ending effect is executed after the final round ends.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obscure a period during which it is difficult to enter the specific area due to the ending effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the period when the inflow to a specific area is difficult can be made not conspicuous, and the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the 1st special variation winning device. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a figure explaining a model specification command. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a discharge ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch big hit judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining an upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a lower great prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability change operation area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining sphere process timer update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the execution timing of a regular effect and a condition achievement effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a regular effect and a condition achievement effect. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a figure explaining a change group table. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a PB gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining PB input command edit processing. It is a figure explaining the output mode of a PB command. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of a normal fluctuation winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining abnormal discharge | emission monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall | game player setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of a special game state. It is a figure explaining another example of the execution mode of a special game state. It is a figure explaining another example of the execution mode of a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining PB information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining an effect button input process. It is a figure explaining the input state by operation of a PB command and an operation means. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of a gaming machine. It is a back view of a gaming machine. It is the elements on larger scale in the back surface of a 1st control apparatus. It is a reverse view of a 2nd control apparatus. It is a figure explaining auxiliary production. It is a flowchart explaining an auxiliary | assistant effect control process. It is a figure explaining the setting of the open standby time in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the setting of the open standby time in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of a game board. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect in the special game state in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special winning opening open process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit system command processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the execution timing of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the regular effect in a 4th modification, and a condition achievement effect. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation pattern setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the change group table in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode and display time table of the special figure fluctuation display game in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 usual process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 usual process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 forced stop process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 forced stop process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 in a 5th modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to the outer frame (support frame) 11 so that the upper and lower sides of the left end viewed from the front side can be opened and closed via a hinge 13. Yes. The outer frame 11 has a rectangular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to the island facility of the game store. The front frame 12 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11 around a rotation shaft 13a extending in the vertical direction, and the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is the open end side. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12 so as to be capable of opening and closing.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  The frame decoration device 18 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of auxiliary effect devices capable of executing an assist effect that is an effect performed in response to a game effect that is an effect corresponding to the progress of the game. The protrusion part 80 which comprises is provided. The projecting portion 80 is provided so as to project from the right side surface of the front frame 12 so that a player playing a game on the gaming machine is visible and a player playing a game on the gaming machine. Visible from other people. The protrusion 80 includes a plurality of light emitting regions 81 arranged along the vertical direction. Each light emitting area 81 can control the light emitting mode (turning on, turning off, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) independently, and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81.

  The game effect, which is an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, includes, for example, an error notification for notifying that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, a game effect related to the running special-figure display game, and a pre-determined result of the start memory There is a pre-reading effect that suggests or informs, an effect button operation effect that instructs operation of the operating means, and a firing direction instruction notification that instructs the firing direction of the game ball in the game area. In the projecting portion 80, an auxiliary effect is executed by changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 in accordance with the game effect selected according to the current game state from among these game effects.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. The effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 serve as operation means for accepting the player's operation. In addition, the effect button 25 has a built-in LED so that the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.) on the upper surface can be changed. Auxiliary effects can be executed. That is, the effect button 25 also constitutes one of the auxiliary effect devices that can execute the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

  Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment. On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display regions) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure 8 are arranged. Each illuminant can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display by controlling the light emission mode. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. The display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) in a variable manner corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game and then stops the display. Further, an effect related to the special figure variation display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided above the display device 41 in the center case 40 to perform a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the circumferential surface facing the front is visible to the player. . Information is displayed for each area that can be visually recognized when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction. Information displayed on the front facing the front Thus, the special figure variation display game is produced. In addition, a decorative special figure start memory display unit 42 for performing a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided below the display device 41 in the center case 40.

  Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5). Further, below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition of the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball that has passed through the normal start gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, below the usual figure start gate 34, a normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize opening, start prize area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game. Is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (disadvantageous for the player) that is vertically closed so that game balls cannot flow in is maintained. When the result of the universal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal variation solenoid winning is operated by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as the driving device so that the upper end side is tilted forward. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is provided on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal variable winning apparatus 37. Has been placed. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

  Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable prize winning device (lower large prize opening) that can be converted into a state that does not accept a game ball and a state that is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 38 and a second special variable prize-winning device (upper university prize-winning opening) 39 are provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower large prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the lower game winning opening by converting the lower game winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is provided inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower major prize opening. Yes.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the upper game winning opening by converting the upper game winning opening from a closed state to an open state, and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. An upper prize port switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes.

  FIG. 3 shows a flow path of game balls in the first special variation winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a lower big prize opening switch (count switch) 38a as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning device 38 is disposed. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the lower large winning port switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

  The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probability change operation region 38h into which a game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability change operation region 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member is a plate-like member that is slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 3, the lever member protrudes forward to cover the probability changing operation region 38h, and the lever is retracted backward and closed in a state where the game ball cannot flow into the probability changing operation region 38h. Thus, it can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability changing operation region 38h.

  The probability variation operation region 38h is provided with a probability variation operation region switch 38d that can detect the inflow of game balls. The game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k. Flow into. Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to a high probability state after the special game state is ended.

  Further, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided on the left downstream side of the probability change operation region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation region 38h After being detected by the passage port switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is configured such that a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the probability variation operating region 38h flows down and a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage port switch 38g flow downstream. A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, and all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into the discharge channel for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the first special variation winning device 38 configured as described above, the number of game balls detected by the lower large winning port switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the probability changing operation region switch 38d and the passing port switch 38g match. By doing this, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Further, since the number of game balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are all. It can be confirmed that it was discharged. Further, the number of game balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, so that the game balls flowing into the first special variable prize winning device 38 can be obtained. It can be confirmed that everything was discharged.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, among the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 Is the right game area. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and the game is moved to the right game area. By launching the ball (so-called “right-handed”), it is possible to aim for a prize at the general start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35. It can be done.

  Further, a plate-shaped partition wall 91 is provided between the center case 40 and the guide rail 31 from the upper side to the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The partition wall 91 is arranged along the guide rail 31 with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the guide rail 31. The partition wall 91 is a width from the front surface of the game board main body 90 to the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the plate-like game board main body 90 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). ) Extends forward.

  The interval between the partition wall 91 and the regulation wall 92 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 to prevent the game ball from flowing into the center case 40 is also equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, both sides of the partition wall 91 are flow areas where game balls can flow down, the first flow area 93 sandwiched between the partition wall 91 and the guide rail 31, the partition wall 91 and the regulation wall 92. A second falling region 93 is formed between the two.

  It can be selected by adjusting the firing force which of the first flowing area 93 and the second flowing area 93 the game ball is allowed to flow into. The inlets of the first downstream region 93 and the second downstream region 93 are located above the center case 40, and the inlet of the first downstream region 93 is located above the inlet of the second downstream region 93. doing. Therefore, in order to aim at the inflow of the game ball into the second flow down region 93, it is necessary to make the launching force weaker than when the game ball flows into the first flow down region 93.

  When the center case 40 is small like the game board 30, a large space is created between the guide rail 31 and the restriction wall 92. In this case, it is common to place obstacle members such as game nails and windmills in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area when making a right strike due to the presence of the obstacle member Variations will occur. For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the game ball on the right game area, and stable winning to the special variation winning device 38 and the normal variation winning device 37 is hindered, and the player's profit is reduced. There is a fear.

  Therefore, this space is divided into the first flow-down area 93 and the second flow-down area 93 by the partition wall 91, so that the first flow-down area 93 can stably reach the game area on the right side without any obstacle member. The second flow-down area 93 can be an area where the change of the rolling mode of the game ball by the obstacle member can be enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the profits of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

  In addition, by providing the first flow down region 93 without an obstructing member on the upper side, when the game ball is fired with the strongest firing force by turning the operation unit 24 to the maximum, the first flow down region 93 flows into the first flow down region 93. Become. Then, by setting the first flow down area 93 to a width that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, it is possible to always receive the game balls heading leftward by the buffer portion 95 provided on the guide rail 31. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a strong launching force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 95 and to prevent the game board 30 from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a PB input mode switching gate 96 is provided in the second downstream area 93. The PB input mode switching gate 96 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and a PB input mode switching gate switch 96a for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided therein. As will be described later, every time a game ball is detected by the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a, the state is equivalent to when the player operates without operating the operating means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29). The automatic input mode is switched to the manual input mode which is not operated unless the player operates the operating means. Thereby, the player can switch the auto input mode and the manual input mode according to the player's intention by adjusting the firing force and passing the PB input mode switching gate 96.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure fluctuation display game, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a special figure start gate 34 that make a special figure fluctuation display game are awarded. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display for special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) and start memory number notification of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamp Special figure 1 hold indicator 54 (D11, D12), and special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D13, D14) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed), a short time state (during normal power support, specific game state) The first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) for informing whether the player is in the middle), and the first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) for informing the player of the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike, which is advantageous to the player (the strike method corresponding to the game state). A two-game state display unit 77 (D8) is provided. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It has been. Further, the collective display device 50 includes a general map display 74 (D10, D18) for the normal variation display game, and a general map hold display 75 (D15, D16) for informing the start memory number of the general variation display game. Is provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Moreover, you may display that it is changing by displaying sequentially the some identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The special figure 1 holding indicator 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (first starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in FIG. 4C, display is performed by turning off and lighting (flashing) a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 2 hold display 55 displays the number of undigested balls (second start memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37 which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, As shown in FIG. 4C, display is performed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off and selected according to the result in the special game state as shown in FIG. 4 (d). The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when in the time-short state, and turns off the LED when not in the time-short state. As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second gaming state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the gaming state is more advantageous for the player to the left than the right strike (normal strike). In a gaming state where it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike, the LED is turned on. As shown in FIG. 4E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the high probability state is present when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when the state is not the high probability state.

  In the general map change display game in the general map display 74, the change symbol number shown in FIG. 4 (g) is alternately changed and the two LEDs are alternately lit during the variable display of the general map display game. Display that it is changing. If the result is a win, it is turned on in a lighting manner according to the hit type and indicates that it is a hit, and if the result is out of order, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that they are out of place. . The general map hold indicator 75 indicates the number of undigested balls (the number of normal map start memory = the number of reserves) out of the number of passing balls of the general map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. That is, the RAM 111C serves as storage means that can hold data even when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to cancel the error even when the power is not turned on, but in this case, only the error is canceled and processing such as initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. .

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, a variation pattern table for determining the variation time of the normal variation display game is also stored.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b include a PB input mode switching gate switch 96a in the PB input mode switching gate 96, a gate switch 34a in the general start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a in the general winning port 35, and a first special button. A lower prize winning port switch 38a in the variable prize winning device 38, an upper prize winning switch 39a in the second special variable prize winning device 39, a probability changing operation region switch 38d provided in a probability changing operation region 38h in the first special variable winning device 38, A start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning award port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, and a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variable winning device 38 are detected. Passing port switch 38g, discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a game ball discharged from the first special variable winning device 38, and a gaming machine Board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the firing of a radio wave are connected.

  Outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, the upper large winning port switch 39a, the probability changing operation region switch 38d, Detection signals from the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a are input to the second input port 123.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (provided on the front frame 12). And a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) is also input. .

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output from the passage port switch 38g out of the outputs to the third input port 124 are transmitted from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test apparatus (not shown). Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (lower A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the tray 23 (full), a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) ) And supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 is provided. The first input port 122 has a detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a main body frame open detection provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and has a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b that opens the first special variation winning apparatus 38, an upper large prize opening solenoid 39b that opens the second special variation winning apparatus 39, and a normal fluctuation. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of a normal solenoid 37c for opening the winning device 37 and a lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b output from the second output port 134, an upper large prize opening solenoid 39b, a general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and a first special variable winning apparatus 38. Current of the collective display device 50 output from the first driver (driving circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that generate and output a solenoid driving signal in response to the operation data signal of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member 38i A second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the supply side, and a third driver that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. External information signal supplied from the driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device The fourth driver 138d is provided for outputting to the information terminal plate 71.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the lower large winning port switch 38a. The upper large prize opening switch 39a, the probability change operation area switch 38d, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage opening switch 38g in the first special variable prize-winning device 38 are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a magnetic field is brought into contact with the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon that changes is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the display device control circuit 312 to display the contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, and turns on the decoration lamp. Then, processing such as motor / solenoid drive control and production time management is executed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the front frame 12 and the like. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 312 and 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect moving body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15. You may have.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. Further, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the display device control circuit 312, the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET for controlling the driving of lamps, motors, etc. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the first special variable prize winning device 38, or the second special variable prize winning device 39 is won or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32. 32 is discharged. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning winning port. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball thrown in passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure start memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four pieces). If it is less than (), the usual figure start memory number is added (+1), and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 75 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the normal figure start memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It has come to be.

  Then, when there is a general map start memory and the normal map variable display game can be started, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed, the normal map variable display game is hit and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the winning state is not the winning state, the winning judgment random number value stored in the first stored base map start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the hitting of the base map variable display game is lost. Then, a process for starting the normal map change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  In addition, as a process for executing the normal variation display game, the game control device 100 determines in advance a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined variation time on the general diagram display 74 provided in the collective display device 50. After the usual map change display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order is performed, a process for displaying the usual figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. The universal display 74 is configured by the display device 41. For example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed by stopping the display. It may be configured.

  When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a lighting pattern that is either the first per-stop symbol or the second per-stop symbol that forms a special result mode corresponding to the type of the hit is displayed on the general-purpose indicator 74. In addition to displaying a stop, the ordinary solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, the general display display 74 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is a result of the shift.

  Also, the winning ball to the start winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100, the first start memory that makes the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The second start memory that stores the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winning at the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of start memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display at a predetermined location of the center case 40. Is done.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 is stored in the earliest start-up memory corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game to be started when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started. The big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

  When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display, a process for displaying the special figure 1 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined variable time. After performing the special figure 2 fluctuation display, a process of displaying a special figure 2 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed.

  Further, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, etc.) corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device). A process for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game for variably displaying is performed. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various presentation displays such as a change in display color and variation mode are performed to improve interest.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, A process for generating a gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the lower big prize winning solenoid 38b, and the game ball flows into the lower big prize winning opening. And the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, and the control allowing the game ball to flow into the upper prize winning opening is performed. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved, A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round. ing. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a special result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time. In the short time state, it is possible to control so that the normal stop time for displaying the result of the normal change display game becomes the second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the opening time (the general electric release time) is longer than the first opening time in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be two open times. Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is larger than the number of times of opening the first time, with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. Can be set. Also, in the short time state, the probability (the normal figure probability) that is a hit result of the normal figure variation display game is higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state (for example, 250/251). Is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In the present embodiment, it is set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure variation display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, or may use the same display apparatus and display area. Although it is good, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed so that it is not executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed in the order of occurrence of the start-up memory. In the description of the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  7 and 8 show operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state. There are five types of special results: 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 5R normal, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal, which are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. Each jackpot type number indicates the number of rounds. Probability means that there is a high probability that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h, and that it is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state ends. This indicates that there is a low possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability changing operation region 38h, and it is difficult for a high probability state (probability changing state) to occur after the special gaming state ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is determined is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h. If a game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and even if the big hit type is normal, the game state enters a high probability state if the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h.

  In FIG. 7, the opening aspect in each round with each jackpot type was shown. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 12R probability variation, the lower V opening that opens the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower V opening is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. In the second and subsequent rounds, upper long opening for opening the second special variable winning device 39 and lower long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, in the 5R probability variation and 4R probability variation in which the jackpot type is a certain variation, the lower V is opened to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. Also, in the case of 5R normal and 4R normal where the big hit type is normal, the lower short is opened to open the first special variable winning device 38 in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h is lower than the lower V opening.

  In any type of jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be alternately opened, so that a predetermined number of game balls have been won or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. When the predetermined interval time has passed after the round has ended, the other special variable winning device is released. It should be noted that the game ball can be allowed to flow into the probability changing operation region 38h only in the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the first round. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variable winning device 39, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h. Further, since the lever member 38i is not operated in the lower long opening or the lower short opening that is not the first round, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h. In other words, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round that is a round in which the game ball may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area is the first round. Of course, this specific round may be a round other than the first round.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), in the upper long opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9) When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the interval time and the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are configured to be opened alternately, so that the first special variable winning device is obtained as the interval time elapses. Although the device 38 is opened, the second special variable winning device 39 continues the upper ball winning opening remaining ball processing time. The lower short opening shown in FIG. 8B is the same as the upper long opening except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the lower V is opened, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability change operation region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability change operation region 38h. The game ball is ready to flow. The state in which the probability variation operation region switch 38d is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the probability change operation region switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened will flow into the probability changing operation area 38h.

  When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and the condition of whether a 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower sphere winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

  In addition, after the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability changing operation region switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the lever solenoid 38f is kept on for a long time, so that the game ball flows almost certainly into the probability changing operation region 38h. It will be. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. The game balls that have been played can also flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is processed in the lower large winning port remaining ball processing. When all the balls are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled.

  In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed and the operation is finished. The probability changing operation region switch 38d becomes invalid.

  In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the lower large winning port remaining ball processing time. In the case where all the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged before the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43). The lever solenoid 38f is turned off to complete the operation. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the probability variation operation region switch 38d becomes invalid after 100 ms (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 8D, in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening ends. The round ends (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also ON for a short time, the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal.

  Note that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid / invalid switching of the probability variation operating region switch are performed in the same manner as in the case where the lower V is released as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t55). ~ T63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the lower ball winning port remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. As a result, the operation ends and the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62). When the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) and 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  However, the lever solenoid 38f and the probability variation operating region switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 4D when the lower short is opened only when the lower short is opened in the first round. When the lower short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the probability change operation region switch 38d remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining sphere processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the lower long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t71), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9). When one of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t72). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower sphere winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t72), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t73). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In the lower long open state, the lever solenoid 38f remains in the OFF state, and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is also disabled.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, first, the process for prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy judging means for judging the legitimacy of predetermined data stored in the storage means (RAM 111C) when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, The on (lighting) data of the third game state display section 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). That is, when the validity is confirmed by the validity judgment means, the game is resumed based on the data stored in the storage means.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random numbers according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) Save in the specified area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) From (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Yes. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same cycle as the processing. In addition, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number adopt a so-called “initial value change method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Yes. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shuts down. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  FIG. 11 shows the types of model designation commands that are one of the commands transmitted in step S25 and step S30. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, model type A as a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of a big hit, the number of times of execution of a special-figure variable display game in a short-time state, the type of big hit, distribution, and distribution of effects. There are four types of ~ D. Furthermore, each model type includes a plurality of models having different model names. For example, model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

  In the game control apparatus 100, any one model type among a plurality of model types is set, and any one model name among a plurality of model names included in the model type is set. . The model designation command differs depending on the model type and model name. When the power is turned on, a model designation command corresponding to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  The effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 based on the received model designation command. A default symbol corresponding to the received model designation command is displayed on the display device 41. Thereby, the model type and model name of the said model can be confirmed by confirming the display of the display apparatus 41 at the time of power activation.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, the model designation command is a value indicating that MODE is a model designation command (05H in this case), and ACTION corresponds to the model type and model name. It is the value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, a model designation command having MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H is transmitted as a model designation command. Then, in the production control device 300, based on the reception of the model designation command with MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H, it is understood that the model name is A-1 and the model name is A-1, and is displayed on the display device 41 as a default symbol. 131 is displayed.

  In the default symbol, since the upper 2 digits correspond to the model type and the lower 1 digit corresponds to the model name, the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbols are not limited to those shown in FIG. 11 and can be arbitrarily set. However, a symbol that is a combination of reach (for example, 767) or a symbol that is a combination of jackpots (for example, 777) may not be used. The default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game. Further, each or all of the symbols included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decoration special-figure display game. The default symbol is a symbol corresponding to the model type and model name, but may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and model name.

  Alternatively, the second default symbol may be displayed after the default symbol corresponding to the model type and model name is displayed for a certain period of time. The second default symbol may be anything, but for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and the appearance may be the same for gaming machines of the same model but different model types. . Further, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Moreover, you may enable it to set a 2nd default symbol in an amusement store.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the bonus initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), the bonus symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), End the initial value random number update process. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “big hit initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit of the normal symbol variation display game The “random symbol initial value random number” that is the initial value of the random number is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning stop symbol of the normal figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on output data set in various processes, output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower large prize opening solenoid 38b, upper large prize opening solenoid 39b, general electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f) and the like. Processing (step S104) is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, whether or not a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a. And a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors and monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened).

  Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). The abnormal discharge error means that the game ball existing in the upper flow path 38j is zero, but the discharge from the upper flow path 38j is detected, or the game ball existing in the lower flow path 38k is zero. Nevertheless, the discharge from the lower flow path 38k is detected (see FIG. 87). When an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set.

  If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from progressing. Further, when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game process (step S110) for performing the process related to the special figure change display game, and the normal figure game process (step S110) for performing the process related to the normal figure change display game. S111), a segment LED editing process (step S112) is performed for driving the segment LED that is provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents.

  Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113), a magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) for performing a process of checking and determining whether there is an abnormality is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S116) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

  Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there. Further, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data has the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is set. Save (store) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) to pass until the second reading (step S145).

  When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state ( The first data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step S150). The deterministic bit pattern and the port input state are ANDed to confirm this time. Bits are set (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not there has been a change, in such a case, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the general power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f are synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have a function to do so, it is possible to realize accurate payout control.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S214; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number update process 1 ends. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning mouth switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning mouth monitoring table corresponding to the upper winning port switch 39a in the upper winning port (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step S301). In spite of the fact that the winning opening is not open, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the upper large winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination number) and address information of winning prize switch table are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  After that, a winning mouth monitoring table corresponding to the lower winning port switch 38a in the lower winning port (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and an illegal winning is monitored and a normal winning is achieved. An illegal & winning prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always be won (step S307), and the winning number counter is updated to update the winning number. Processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not “0” (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the detection signal 2 is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the process proceeds to step S318. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

  Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) for monitoring the detection of abnormal input at the probability change operation region switch 38d is performed (step S319), and a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j (step S319). I do. Further, a discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. The fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on the lower special prize opening switch 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the upper big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. This is a process performed on the device. For the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37, it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the winning ball. Monitor fraud in addition to detection.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period in which the flag for lower fraud prize fraud monitoring period is set when the winning prize switch for error monitoring is the lower prize winning switch 38a. When the upper prize winning port switch 39a is set, the flag during the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period is set, and when the prize opening switch subject to error monitoring is the start opening 2 switch 37a, This is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

  In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error. You can also. The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326) and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. If the value of the notification timer is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S334), and the fraud win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S338). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S338).

  If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S339), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 23 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 24 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

  When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411). The probability variation operating region 38h being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operating region switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). When the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. If the probability change operation region 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch (step S412).

  If there is no input to the probability change operation region switch (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418. When there is an input to the probability change operation region switch (step S412; Y), processing relating to the occurrence of V abnormal passage error after step S413 is performed. The lever member 38i can flow into the probability changing operation region 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability changing operation region 38h. The period during which the probability change operation region switch 38d is valid starts when the lever member 38i is retracted, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i covers the probability change operation region 38h flows into the probability change operation region. The process ends when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability changing operation region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operation region switch 38d is not valid, the fact that there is an input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and processing related to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

  In the processing related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error, first, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60 seconds here) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is set to the error occurrence flag. (Step S414). If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurrence flag (step S414; Y), that is, if an error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated.

  If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurrence flag (step S414; N), that is, if it is determined that there is an error in the current process, the error occurrence flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area ( Step S415), a V abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (Step S416). Thereafter, an effect command setting process is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error in response to reception of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

  On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418). If the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. In this case, an abnormal V passing error is not occurring. If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by -1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

  If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the V abnormal passage error notification continues. When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), a normal flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and a V abnormal passage release command is prepared (step S422). . Thereafter, an effect command setting process is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification with the reception of the V abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Remaining sphere monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S431). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, -1 is updated (step S432), and step S433 is performed. Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S433). If there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, -1 is updated (step S434). The process proceeds to S435.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step S435). If there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438. If there is an input to the lower big prize opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S436), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is entered. The timer initial value is saved (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the upper flow path 38j after being discharged and set to be discharged is set. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, the value is set so that 3 seconds can be measured by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, if there is no gaming ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball is counted. An error canceling flag is prepared (step S444), a remaining ball error cancel command is prepared (step S445), and the process proceeds to step S446.

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the upper flow path 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error has already occurred (step S439). If a remaining sphere error has already occurred (step S439; Y), the remaining sphere monitoring process ends. If no remaining sphere error has already occurred (step S439; N), the remaining sphere monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining sphere monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

  If the remaining sphere monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated. If the remaining sphere monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), a remaining sphere error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and a remaining sphere error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining sphere error flag area (step S447), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), and the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on reception of the remaining sphere error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending error notification based on reception of the remaining sphere error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls are not discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has passed since the last game ball flowed into the upper flow path 38j. A ball error is determined. Thereby, for example, an illegal act of leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread in the upper flow path 38j can be prevented.

[Ejected ball monitoring processing]
FIG. 28 shows the discharged ball monitoring process (step S320) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a game ball discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, a game ball discharged from the first special variation winning device 38. (Step S451). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), if the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is not 0, -1 is updated (step S452), and step S453 Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S453). If there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456. To do. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S454), and a timer is displayed in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step S456). If there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459. . When there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by 1 (step S457), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is entered. The timer initial value is saved (step S458), and the process proceeds to step S459.

  The passage port switch 38g and the probability change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting a game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k. Based on the detection of the game ball by these switches, the discharge ball counter is incremented by +1. Update and save the initial timer value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharged ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharged ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, the initial value is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time taken from flowing into the lower flow path 38k to being discharged without any abnormality. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, the value is set so that 3 seconds can be measured by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459). If the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, if there is no game ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball counter An error canceling flag is prepared (step S465), a discharge ball error cancel command is prepared (step S466), and the process proceeds to step S467.

  On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460). If a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. If no discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

  If the discharged ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated. If the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and a discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharged ball error flag area (step S467).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharged ball error flag area (step S467; Y), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S468), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls are not discharged from the lower flow path 38k even after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the last game ball flowed into the lower flow path 38k, A ball error is determined. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread in the lower flow path 38k.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, an upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the upper prize winning port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 is performed. Further, the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring detection of a game ball by the lower major prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 is performed.

  Thereafter, the probability change operation region switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In this probability change operation region switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the probability change operation region switch 38d provided in the probability change operation region 38h is performed. Next, PB gate switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the PB input mode switching gate switch 96a provided in the PB input mode switching gate 96 is performed (step A5), and remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A6) is performed. . In the remaining ball processing timer update processing, processing for managing the big winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are closed is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A7). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A8). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A8; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A9), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A10). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A11).

  If the special figure game process number is “0” in step A11, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, or during the special figure fluctuation. A special figure routine process (step A12) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure game process number is “1” in step A11, the special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A13) is performed.

  In step A11, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A14) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  In step A11, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A15) is performed. In step A11, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, whereas if it is the final round, an ending command is set, A special prize opening opening process (step A16) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

  In step A11, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and a big hit end process are performed. The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A11, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A23) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, a PB input command editing process is performed (step A24), and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A8 (step A8; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103). If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

  If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300. Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111). If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no unauthorized power transmission (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning of the monitoring target starting port out of the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is displayed. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and therefore, it is determined that the output count overflows and is not updated.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A137), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A138).

  Next, the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A139), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A140), and prepared in step A125. The big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A141). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A144), and the address of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number is stored. Is calculated (step A145), and the target variation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, and the special order 1 is used as the variable order flag in the variable order flag storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the digest order. Alternatively, the digestion order of the starting memory is managed by storing the information of the special figure 2. Thereafter, a special figure hold information determination process (step A147) for determining information about the start memory before digesting the start memory is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A147) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared in order to make a determination based on a determination value in a low-probability state (step A151), and a prefetch jackpot determination process is performed (step A152). If the result of the pre-reading jackpot determination process is a big hit (step A153; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142 is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157. If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not big hit (step A153; N), that is, if it is out of place, outage stop symbol information is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

  Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), and a pre-read stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158), and an effect command setting process (Step A159). Thereby, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform determination based on the determination value in the high probability state (step A160), and prefetching jackpot determination processing is performed (step A161). If the result of the pre-reading jackpot determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142 is set. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166. If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not big hit (step A162; N), that is, if it is out of place, outage stop symbol information is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is in effect (step A166). If it is not in a special figure high probability (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168. If the special symbol high probability is present (step A166; Y), the stopped symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168. Thereafter, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A169). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (step A170), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A170). A171). Thereafter, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game are prepared (step A172), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that as the prefetch stop symbol command, commands corresponding to the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state are transmitted. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the apparatus 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the decoration special figure start memory display unit 42 of the center case 40, etc., from the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the prefetching jackpot determination process (steps A152 and A161) in the above special figure hold information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A181), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; Y), the deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination (step A183).

  If the determination flag is high probability determination (step A183; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186). When the determination flag is not a high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, when the determination flag is a low probability determination flag, an upper limit determination value during a low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; Y), the deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated.

[Monitoring process for the upper prize winning switch]
Next, details of the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the top prize winning port switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the big prize opening opening process is in progress (step A191). ). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S191). A192).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. When the special winning opening remaining ball process is not in progress (step A192; N), the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”. The progress of the game can be checked by the number.

  Then, it is determined whether the upper prize winning opening is in operation (step A193). When the upper prize winning port is in operation, there is a possibility that the second special variable winning device 39 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a win includes a predetermined period after the open / close door 39c is activated and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and after the open state is converted to a closed state. . If the upper prize winning opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. If the upper prize winning opening is operating (step A193; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 39a (step A194).

  If there is no input to the upper prize winning opening switch (step A194; N), the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (step A194; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step A195), and an effect command setting process (step A196) is performed. As a result, the production control device 300 can execute the production according to the winning of the second special variation winning device 39. Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A197). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A197; N), the upper prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the special winning opening is being opened (step A197; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A198), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (can be won in one round). It is determined whether the number of game balls (for example, “9”) or more is reached (step A199).

  If the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A199; N), the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; Y), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the big prize opening is being opened (step A201). ). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).

  When the big winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning game remaining ball process is not in progress (step A202; N), the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”. The progress of the game can be checked by the number.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lower prize winning opening is in operation (step A203). The operation of the lower large prize opening is a state in which there is a possibility that the first special variable prize winning device 38 may detect a prize. The possibility of detecting a win includes not only the open state in which the open / close door 38c is activated and the game ball can be won, but also a predetermined period after the open state is converted to the closed state. . If the lower major prize opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is operating (step A203; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 38a (step A204).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A204; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A204; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A205), and an effect command setting process (step A206) is performed. As a result, the production control device 300 can execute the production according to the winning of the first special variation winning device 38. Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A207). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A207; N), the lower prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the special winning opening is being opened (step A207; Y), the winning prize count is incremented by one (step A208), and the special winning prize count is the upper limit (a single round can be won). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls (for example, “9”) or more is reached (step A209).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the hit end pointer value from the special figure end pointer area is cleared. Is saved in the control pointer area per special figure (step A211), and the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probability switching area monitoring process]
Next, details of the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process (step A4) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probability change operation region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation region 38h is valid (step A221). The probability variation operating region 38h being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operating region switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). When the probability variation operation region 38h is not valid (step A221; N), the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the probability changing operation region 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability changing operation region switch (step A222).

  If there is no input to the probability change operation region switch (step A222; N), the probability change operation region switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the probability change operation region switch (step A222; Y), a probability change operation region passage command is prepared (step A223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A224). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the game ball flowing into the probability changing operation region 38h.

  Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation. In the case of big hits with these symbols, the lower V is released, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal which is not an easy V symbol, the lower short is released, so that the game ball rarely flows into the probability changing operation region 38h.

  When the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A225; Y), the probability variation operation region normal passage information is set (step A226), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A228). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated. If the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A225; N), the probability variation operation region irregular passage information is set (step A227), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A229). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Remaining ball processing timer update processing]
Next, details of the remaining ball processing timer update process (step A6) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer update processing, first, the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer for managing the upper ball winning port remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Is 0 (step A231).

  When the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A231; Y), that is, when the upper special winning opening residual ball processing time is not remaining, which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Shifts to Step A235. Further, when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A231; N), that is, when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time is in progress, the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( Step A232), it is determined whether or not the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

  When the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A233; N), the process proceeds to step A235. If the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), a setting at the end of the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time is performed (step A234). In the setting at the end of the processing time of the upper prize winning ball remaining, the special electric player 1 operation signal is set to OFF, the upper prize winning opening release flag is cleared, and the flag during the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period is saved. To do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer for managing the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 (step A235). If the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A235; N), that is, if the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is being processed, the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether or not the lower grand prize winning port remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (Step A237).

  If the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A237; N), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is terminated. Also, when the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time is performed (step A238). In the setting at the end of the processing time of the remaining ball at the lower prize winning opening, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF, the lower winning prize opening state flag is cleared, and the flag during illegal monitoring of the lower prize winning opening is saved. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239). If the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is terminated. The lever solenoid being stopped is a state that is set when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state. In this case, the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the remaining ball processing time elapses, and therefore processing relating to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the remaining ball processing time elapses is not performed.

  If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation in-progress information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the remaining ball number is 0 (step A242). ). If the number of remaining spheres is not zero (step A242; N), the remaining sphere processing timer update process is terminated. In this case, the remaining ball monitoring operation of the lever solenoid is maintained.

  If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid at the time of the remaining ball monitoring is set (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the time of the remaining ball monitoring end, the stopping information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the stopping value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area. Also, the control timer area in the lever solenoid control area is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, if the lower big prize opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, if the lower big prize opening remaining ball processing time has already ended, the lever solenoid is in the remaining ball monitoring operation. (Step A241). When the lever solenoid is not in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated. When the lever solenoid is in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (step A242; Y), the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring (step A243) is performed, and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is completed.

  With the above processing, the upper major winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time are managed. The timer for managing the upper ball winning ball remaining ball processing time and the lower University winning ball remaining ball processing time is a timer different from the special game processing timer in order to manage at least the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to manage the upper ball winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower winning ball remaining ball processing time in parallel with the progress of the special gaming state. That is, while managing the opening of one special variable winning device, it is possible to manage the large winning opening remaining ball processing time of the other special variable winning device.

  If one special figure game processing timer is used to control the interval time and the subsequent winning prize remaining ball processing time with one special figure game processing timer, the special figure game processing timer manages the interval time after managing the openable time in the round. After that, since the management of the winning ball remaining ball processing time is performed to manage the time available for opening the next round, the time between rounds becomes long. If an attempt is made to shorten the time between rounds, the time for processing the remaining ball in the big prize opening is also shortened, so that it is likely that the regular winning is treated as invalid. In order to prevent such a situation, conversely, if the extra winning opening remaining ball processing time is lengthened, there is a problem that the time between rounds becomes longer and the digestion speed in the special gaming state is sacrificed.

  In addition, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is always possible to ensure a sufficiently long upper large winning port remaining ball processing time and a lower large winning port remaining ball processing time. It becomes possible to do. Then, after the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing time, the fraud monitoring period is set until the special variable winning device that is the target of the winning ball remaining ball processing time is opened. Even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball with respect to the special variable winning device that maintains the closed state after the end of the ball processing time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Game control means (game control device 100), a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can win And the game control means opens one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 in each round in a special game state composed of a plurality of rounds. By changing the special variable winning device that is opened every round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened every round. Based on the completion of the opening in the round, the control is performed so as to start the processing time for processing the remaining winning ball in the special winning opening which treats the detection of the game ball flowing into the special variable winning device opened in the round as a normal winning game, The processing time is measured by a timer different from at least a timer (special game processing timer) for managing the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special gaming state.

  Therefore, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure a large winning port remaining ball processing time for the closed special variable winning device, and a large winning port remaining ball. Since the processing time and the opening time of the special variable winning device are managed independently, it is possible to appropriately manage the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing time for the other special variable winning device while one special variable winning device is opened and closed It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the special variable winning device.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) is configured to perform the process from the end of the big winning opening remaining ball processing time until the special variable winning apparatus targeted for the big winning opening remaining ball processing time is released. This means that the winning to the special variable winning device is invalidated. Therefore, fraudulent acts during the special game state can be prevented.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are “0”. (Step A301). If both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), that is, if at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the change order flag A flag is loaded from the storage area (for the total number of holdings 1) (step A302), and it is determined whether the fluctuation is that shown in FIG. 1 (step A303).

  If the special figure 1 fluctuation (step A303; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 information is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1), the special figure 1 holding number is set. A corresponding decoration special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and an effect command setting process (step A305) is performed. At this time, since the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the current special figure 1 hold number-1 value is prepared. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1), it corresponds to the number of holdings of special figure 2 A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), and an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed. At this time, since the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the current special figure 2 hold number-1 value is prepared. Then, the special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  If both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A310). If it has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.

  Next, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A318). Normal processing ends.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination area (step A321). Next, a game frequency command corresponding to the value of the game frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A323).

  After that, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) is performed for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. Next, after the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed, the special symbol which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set ( Step A327). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step A328), and a fluctuation start information setting process (step A328) for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. A329) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A330), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A332), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set here (step A335), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 41, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). Next, a game frequency command corresponding to the value of the game frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A343). Thereafter, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A343) is performed for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A346) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set ( Step A347). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A348) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step A348), and a fluctuation start information setting process (step A348) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game A349) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A350), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A352), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set here (step A355), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area is 0, whereby variation display is started from a state in which all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A362), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A363). Note that “for the number of reservations 1” is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the first special figure 1 start memory in the special figure 1 in the digestion order. Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A364) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A373). In addition, the number for the holding number 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the first special figure 2 start memory in the special figure 2 in the digestion order. Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In the jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability state is set (step A383). If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407). Any of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area. Then, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening release information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The special winning opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A409), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A410), the process proceeds to Step A411. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A412), and an effect command setting process (step A413) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A414), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A415). The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437). Any of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area. Then, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening release information area (step A438), and the process proceeds to step A441. The special winning opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A440), and the process proceeds to Step A441. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441). The decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A442), and an effect command setting process (step A443) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

  Here, an effect in the case of a high probability state will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure variation display game which is the 30th, 60th and 90th times from the end of the special game state, a regular effect is performed. Here, SP reach is generated as a regular performance. In the special figure variation display game which is the 31st to 40th, 61st to 70th, and 91st to 100th games from the end of the special game state, the condition achievement effect is performed. This condition achievement effect is an effect that is a big hit if SP reach occurs. The SP reach includes SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, and any one of them is executed in the regular effect, and if any of them is executed in the condition achievement effect, the condition is achieved.

  Here, after the regular production for executing the SP reach, a condition achievement production is performed in which the occurrence of SP reach, which is the same type of production as the regular production, is a big hit condition. Thus, the condition achievement effect is started after the contents of the condition are shown to the player, and the effect is easy to understand for the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation due to a loss of SP reach executed as a regular effect. In addition, by setting the condition achievement effect condition to SP reach, the gaming machine can grasp whether the condition is achieved before the start of the special figure variation display game by the prefetch process (special figure holding information determination process), In the pre-reading effect that is an effect based on the result of the pre-reading process, more various effects can be performed. Of course, other conditions that can be grasped by the prefetching process may be used as conditions, and in this case as well, various effects can be achieved.

  In addition, the condition achievement effect starts after execution of the regular effect, and the number of games for which the condition achievement effect is executed is less than the number of games until the next regular effect is executed, so that the period of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect To avoid overlapping. As a result, during the execution of the condition achievement effect subject to the occurrence of SP reach, a regular effect that generates SP reach is performed, and the condition is prevented from being unintentionally achieved. It prevents inconsistencies.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of the effect in the high probability state. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 for displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas.

  In addition, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory is provided below the display area. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, it shows that there are four start memories. Yes. The first start memory and the second start memory may be displayed so that they can be distinguished. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest from the display mode that the result of the special figure change display game corresponding to each start-up memory, the result of pre-reading such as a change pattern, the fact that it is the target of the regular effect and the condition achievement effect, and the like.

  On the left side of the display area at the bottom of the display area, a running memory display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. In the in-execution memory display section 84, the decoration start memory display at the left end of the memory display section 83 shifts at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. It is suggested by the display mode.

  FIG. 48A shows a high probability state in which the special figure variation display game, which is the 29th time from the end of the special game state, has ended. In a special figure variation display game in which a regular effect and a condition achievement effect are not performed in a high probability state, an effect indicating that the state is a high probability state is performed. Then, in the 30th special figure fluctuation display game in which the regular effects are executed, the fluctuation display is performed as shown in FIG. 48 (b), and the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 48 (c). SP reach as shown in FIG. Here, the result is out of order, and as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the result of the out-of-range is displayed and the special figure variation display game is ended. In addition, when it is a regular effect, you may make it alert | report that it is a regular effect.

  The condition achievement effect starts from the next game. As shown in FIG. 48 (f), at the start of the 31st special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, a notification that the condition achievement effect is started is issued. In this notification, the set condition is also notified. In addition, the remaining number of games for performing the condition achievement effect is also displayed. When a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit during the condition achievement effect is performed, the condition is achieved, and a reach state is generated as shown in FIG. SP reach occurs as shown in FIG. At this time, a notification that the condition has been achieved is also given. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (i), the result of the big hit is displayed and the special figure variation display game is ended.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A326, A346) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452). . Note that the probability state is one of three states: a low probability state and not a time-short state, a high probability state and a time-short state, a low probability state and a time-short state. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol (step A453). If it is not a missing symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, a pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( Step A459), the special figure information setting process is terminated. If the symbol is a missing symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether the number of high probability fluctuations managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state is the value of the regular effect (step A454). ).

  As described above, the regular effect is executed in the special figure variation display game in which the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state is a predetermined number of times when the special gaming state is in a high probability state. This is a production. Here, SP reach is generated as a regular effect in the special figure variation display game which is the 30th, 60th, and 90th times from the end of the special game state. That is, the case where the high probability variation number is 71, 41 and 11 is the value of the regular effect. If the number of high probability fluctuations is the value of the regular effect (step A454; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the regular effect (step A457), and the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A457). A459), the special figure information setting process is terminated. If the high probability variation number is not the value of the regular effect (step A454; N), it is determined whether the high probability variation number is the condition achievement effect value (step A455).

  As described above, the condition achievement effect is a special figure fluctuation display game in which the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game from the end of the special gaming state is within a predetermined range when the special gaming state is in a high probability state. This is an effect that is executed when the SP reach occurs. Here, the condition achievement effect is performed in the special figure variation display game which is the 31st to 40th, the 61st to 70th, and the 91st to 100th from the end of the special gaming state. That is, the case where the number of high probability fluctuations is 70 to 61, 40 to 31, and 10 to 1 is a value of the condition achievement effect.

  If the number of high probability fluctuations is the value of the condition achievement effect (step A455; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the condition achievement effect (step A458), and the pointer is saved in the fluctuation group selection pointer area. (Step A459), the special figure information setting process is terminated. If the number of high probability fluctuations is not the condition achievement effect value (step A455; N), the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number (step A455). A456), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A459), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. That is, when the result is a big hit, it is possible to select the variation pattern without considering the number of starting memories, and when the result is out of order, it is possible to select the variation pattern considering the number of starting memories. In step A456, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the processing target is Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 and the current presentation mode.

  For example, when the production mode is the normal mode and the processing target is special figure 1, the variable group is considered in consideration of whether the total number of holds is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4-8. Update the selection pointer. Further, when the effect mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of holdings. And when the production mode is other than the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of the pending numbers, and the production mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is FIG. 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the total number of holds is 0 to 1, 2 to 8. It should be noted that the total number of holdings is 0 when there is no starting memory (during a customer waiting demo) and the starting memory is generated and the special figure variation display game is started, and the total number of holdings is 1 Is a case where the special figure variation display game is started with one start-up memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A171, A328, and A348) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A461), and the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A462). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A463).

  Then, a 2-byte distribution process (step A464) is performed to acquire and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (step A465), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved number) 1) is loaded and prepared (step A466). Then, a sorting process (step A467) is performed, the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the fluctuation pattern number area, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated. With this process, the variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 51 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step A464) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data of the selection table (the fluctuation group table prepared in step A462) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A471). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern selection table, but the variation group table defines only the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of (for example, a part of the variation group table in the case where the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data of the selection table (variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A472; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step A477), and 2 bytes are distributed. The process ends. On the other hand, when the top data of the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A472; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A473).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A473 from the random value prepared in Step A463 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A474), and the calculated new random value It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A475). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A476), the process proceeds to step A473, and thereafter Process. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation group table) is obtained (step A473), and then the new random value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A475. A numerical value is calculated (step A474), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475; Y). Thus, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table). If it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A477), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

  Note that the distribution process in step A467 in the above-described variation pattern setting process is the same process as the above-described 2-byte distribution process. However, the program instructions for calculation differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

  FIG. 52 shows a variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state. FIG. 52A is a variation group table when the result is out of order and the regular effect and the condition achievement effect are not executed. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A456 in the special figure information setting process.

  As variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table, there are a reachless system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system, and a distribution value is set for each. The variation group is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535. For example, 64906 values are assigned to a non-reach system. That is, the reachless variation group is selected with a probability of 64906/65536.

  FIG. 52B is a variation group table when the result is out of order and the condition achievement effect is executed. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process. The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table include a non-reach system and a normal short reach system (N reach having a short variation time), and a distribution value is set for each. That is, when the result is lost during the achievement of the condition, the reach is either no reach or normal short reach, and the SP reach that satisfies the condition does not occur.

  FIG. 52C is a variation group table in the case where the result is out of date and the regular effect is executed. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A457 in the special figure information setting process. The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table include the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system, and a distribution value is set for each. That is, SP reach occurs when the result is lost during the regular performance.

  FIG. 52D is a variation group table when the result is a big hit. When the result is a big hit in the high probability state, this variation group table is selected regardless of whether or not the regular performance or the condition achievement performance is executed. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process. The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table include the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system, and a distribution value is set for each. That is, SP reach always occurs when a big hit occurs in a high probability state. Therefore, if the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit is a special figure fluctuation display game that executes a regular production, SP reach that is a regular production is executed. Also, if the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit is a special figure fluctuation display game that executes a condition achievement effect, SP reach that achieves the condition is executed.

  Since the variable group table is set in this way, SP reach occurs in the regular performance regardless of the result. In the condition achievement effect, SP reach occurs only when the result is a big hit. The production control device 300 also manages the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state, and executes the production by grasping the execution of the regular production and the condition achievement production. Of course, the effect control device 100 indicates that the game control device 100 is a regular effect or a condition achievement effect, the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special game state, etc. at a predetermined opportunity (for example, at the start of a special figure variation display game). 300 may be notified, and in this way, the production control device 300 does not have to manage the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In other words, whether the game control device 100 (which may include the effect control device 300) sets the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the variable display game, the condition regarding the variable display game, and achieves the condition in a predetermined period. Condition achievement effect control means for performing an effect of “no”, and periodic effect control means for executing a periodic effect in the variable display game each time a predetermined execution timing is reached.

  Note that the same type of conditions for the regular effects and the condition achievement effects means that the type is SP reach, and any of SP1 to 3 reach may be used. In addition, the conditions for the regular performance and the condition achievement performance are SP reach here, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the SP1 reach of the SP reach may be used, or another variation pattern may be used. Furthermore, an effect other than the variation pattern (such as a specific character appearing) may be used as a condition for the regular effect or the condition achievement effect. Further, the period of the condition achievement effect may be a prefetch zone in which the frequency and accuracy of notifying the prefetch result are higher than in other periods.

  In addition, the period of the condition achievement effect is set to be executed until a predetermined number of special figure change display games are executed, but may be set until a predetermined time elapses. In this case, it is preferable that the time is shorter than the time from the end of the special figure variation display game in which the regular effect is executed to the time when the next regular effect is executed. For example, in the variation group table shown in FIG. 52B, the shortest variation time in the variation pattern that can be selected when the variation group table without reach is selected is 19200 ms, and this variation time is the condition achievement effect. Use the shortest variation time. If the result is out of place, 800 ms is set as the stop time for displaying the result, so the shortest execution time of the variable display game in the condition achievement effect is 20000 ms. Then, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) equal to or less than the number of variable display games that can be executed until the next execution timing comes after the end of the special figure variable display game in which the regular effects are executed (this time is 29 times). The time value multiplied by (for example, 20 seconds) is set as the period of effect achievement. In this way, it is possible to prevent the condition achievement effect period and the regular effect period from overlapping. Further, in this case, for example, if the execution time of the special figure variation display game that is out of place is set to a predetermined time only (for example, 2 seconds), if the result does not become a big hit, the special figure of the predetermined number of times is always produced in the condition achievement effect. The variable display game can be executed. Also, the remaining time until the end may be displayed.

  In addition, a condition achievement effect end condition may be set separately. For example, the condition achievement effect may be terminated in the special figure variation display game when an N-reach occurs or when an effect is made as if the reach state is reached and the reach state is not actually reached. . Moreover, when a specific extension condition is achieved, the period of the condition achievement effect may be extended. In this case, an effect may be added that adds to the display of the number of remaining games and the remaining time. Specific extension conditions include winning a lottery and selecting a specific variation pattern.

In addition, when it becomes clear that the result is a big hit by the pre-reading process or the determination at the start of the special figure variation display game, the notification of the remaining number of games and the remaining time is changed to suggest or notify the fact. Anyway. For example, the display of the number of remaining games and the remaining time is “777”. In addition, the condition achievement effect may be started when a specific start condition is satisfied. For example, the condition achievement effect may be started when it is clear from the pre-reading process that there is a start memory whose result is a big hit. In addition, when the SP reach occurs when the result is out of progress except during the execution of the regular effect or the condition achievement effect, even if the condition achievement effect is started from the next game in which the SP reach that has failed is performed. good.

  In view of the above, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, Condition achievement effect control for setting the effect mode setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for setting the effect mode and the condition regarding whether or not the condition is achieved in a predetermined period. Means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), and the effect mode setting means performs periodic effect control means (game control device) for executing a regular effect in a variable display game every time a predetermined execution timing is reached. 100, an effect control device 300), and the condition achievement effect control means is set on condition that the same type of effect as the regular effect is executed. The it has to be. Therefore, since the condition in the condition achievement effect is executed as the regular effect, the player can accurately grasp the contents of the condition, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, the condition achievement effect control means sets the predetermined period so that the timing at which the periodic effect is executed by the periodic effect control means is not included in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a regular effect in which the same type of effect as the condition achievement effect is executed during the execution of the condition achievement effect.

  Further, the predetermined execution timing of the regular production is that the number of executions of the variable display game from the end of the special gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the regular production is a specific reach production, The predetermined period for executing the achievement effect is a predetermined time from the end of the variable display game in which the regular effect is executed, and the next execution timing comes from the end of the variable display game in which the regular effect is executed. The predetermined time equal to or less than the number of variable display games that can be executed before is multiplied by the shortest execution time in the variable display game in the condition achievement effect, and the condition achievement effect control means sets the condition to a specific reach effect. The execution mode setting means sets a specific reach effect when the result of the variable display game is a special result in a predetermined period of executing the condition achievement effect. And thus is a function. Therefore, since the condition in the condition achievement effect is executed as the regular effect, the player can accurately grasp the contents of the condition, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent a regular effect in which the same type of effect as the condition achievement effect is executed during the execution of the condition achievement effect.

  Further, the predetermined period for executing the condition achievement effect is a period from the variable display game started next to the variable display game for which the regular effect is executed until the predetermined number of variable display games are executed. The number of times is less than the number of times until the next execution timing comes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A329 and A349) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are cleared (step A491). Next, a variation time value table is set (step A492), a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern number is acquired and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A493). Thereafter, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared (step A494), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A495).

  Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A498), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A499). Then, the change order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A501).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in the auto input mode in which the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) is operated without operating the operating means (step A502). If not (Step A502; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the auto input mode is in effect (step A502; Y), the initial value (500 ms here) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A503), and the PB command number area is cleared to 0 (step A504). ), The variation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, in the auto input mode, a PB on command is transmitted when a predetermined time (500 ms in this case) elapses from the start of fluctuation.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern is cited, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A13) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared as information for stopping the fluctuation display (step A601), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S601). A602). Next, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the present embodiment, 800 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol pattern, and 2000 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Thereafter, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A607), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2 change signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initially set in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A609).

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the special figure display in-process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A14) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special chart display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process Is loaded (step A701), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (step A702). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A703), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A703; Y), it is related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A706), round A number upper limit table is set (step A707).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A703; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A704) and a big hit (step A703). When A704; Y) is determined, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, special The signal per symbol 1 is turned ON) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A705), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in this embodiment, any one of 12, 5 or 4) is acquired, Save in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A708). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and an effect command setting process (step A711) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process (step A715) is performed.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). Thereafter, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the big hit fanfare time (100 ms in this case) corresponding to the winning prize opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A718), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A719) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in the auto input mode in which the operation means (actual button 25 or touch panel 29) is operated without operating the operation means (step A720). If not (step A720; N), the special figure display process is terminated. When the auto input mode is being executed (step A720; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A721), and a PB command (here, a PB off command) for the PB command number is prepared (step A722). ). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A723), and the special figure changing process is terminated. Thus, in the auto input mode, a PB off command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation. That is, the game control device 100 has a first special variation winning device 38 or a second special variation winning device 39 based on whether the result is a special result in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the state to the open state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A704 (step A704; N), the time reduction variation frequency update process (step A724) for managing the period of the high probability state or the short time state is performed to set the production mode. A special figure game information check process (step A725) is performed. Next, “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (step A726), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A727), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A727). Step A728). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the player is in the auto input mode in which the operation is performed even if the player does not operate the operating means (step A729). If the player is not in the auto input mode (step A729; N) Ends the special figure display processing. If the auto input mode is in effect (step A729; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A730), and a PB command for the PB command number (here, a PB off command) is prepared (step A731). ). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A732), and the special figure changing process is terminated. Thus, in the auto input mode, a PB off command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening fluctuation number update process (step A724) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the time shortening variation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (short time state) (step A751). If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A751; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A751; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A752). If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A752; N), the process proceeds to step A757. If the special figure has a high probability (step A752; Y), the high probability variation count is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the high probability variation count is "0" (step A754). ).

  When the number of high probability fluctuations is not “0” (step A754; N), the process proceeds to step A757. Also, when the high probability change count becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, when the high probability state ends in this special figure change display game, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A755), the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A756), and the process proceeds to step A757. Note that the information in the probability variation operating area passage information area is cleared by this processing or by turning on the gaming machine.

  Next, the time shortening fluctuation count is updated by −1 (step A757), and it is determined whether the time shortening fluctuation count is “0” (step A758). If the time shortening variation count is not “0” (step A758; N), the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated. Further, when the time shortening variation count becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a signal relating to the time-short end (for example, 2 signals of big hits are turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, both the high probability state and the short time state are ended by executing the same number of special figure variation display games, so when the high probability variation number becomes zero. The number of time shortening fluctuations is also 0, so that the high probability state and the short time state end simultaneously. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. Even when the special figure is in a high probability state, the normal figure only changes in the probability state, so that the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF.

  Next, a number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A761), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A762), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A763). Further, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A764), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A765), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Information Check Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game information check process (step A725) in the special figure display process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the special figure game information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). When the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the special figure game information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the number of games that can be executed in the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by -1 (step A772). It is determined whether the number of times has become “0” (step A773). If the number of games is not “0” (step A773; N), the special figure game information check process is terminated. When the number of games becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the number of games in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the game number area in the RWM. (Step A778), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (Step A779). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A780), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A781), and an effect command setting process ( Step A782) is performed.

  Next, a game number command corresponding to the newly set game number is prepared (step A783), an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed, and the special figure game information check process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A719) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). Even when the special figure is in a high probability state, the normal figure only changes in the probability state, so that the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A794), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A795), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A796).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A797), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 78) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & short time none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

  Next, the high probability variation count area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in a high probability state is cleared to 0 (step A800), and the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in a short time state is managed. The time shortening variation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the game number area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A805). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained. Further, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the process during the fanfare / interval, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start of an odd round that is a round that opens the first special variable winning device 38 (step A841). (Step A841; N), that is, in the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the process proceeds to Step A843. If it is the start of an odd round (step A841; Y), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A842).

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A842; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, if the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the game ball remains in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. In particular, immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, a game ball tends to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, and therefore, there is a very high possibility that a high probability state will occur. For this reason, if there is a remaining ball in the upper flow path 38j, that is, if there is a game ball that may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h that forms a specific region in the first special variation winning device 38, the probability variation is concerned. It is made to wait for the start of the round which opens the 1st special variation prize-winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into operation field 38h. In the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball in the second special variable winning device 39.

  If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A842; Y), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A843), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A843). A844) and effect command setting processing (step A845). Thereafter, a special winning opening opening table is set (step A846), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is acquired and saved (step A847). The big prize opening release data is data indicating which one of the first special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is opened, and an opening mode such as an opening time.

  And it is determined whether it is a long open round from the big winning opening release data and the current round number in the special game state being executed (step A848). The long open round is a round in which the upper long open or the lower long open is set. The upper short opening and the lower short opening are short opening rounds. Further, the latter half of the lower V opening is treated as a long opening, but in this determination, the lower V opening is treated as a short opening round.

  If the round is not long open (step A848; N), the process proceeds to step A851. If it is a long open round (step A848; Y), a long open command is prepared (step A849), an effect command setting process is performed (step A850), and the process proceeds to step A851. The long release command is a command for informing the effect control device 300 of the start of the round that will be long open, and the effect control device 300 starts the effect of long release based on this command.

  Then, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A851). (Step A851; Y), the process proceeds to Step A856. If it is not the final round (step A851; N), it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step A852). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i. In this embodiment, only the first specific round is used.

  If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A852; Y), the lever solenoid operation data is set (step A853), and the process proceeds to step A856. As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

  If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A852; N), it is determined whether the odd-numbered round is started (step A854). If not the odd-numbered round is started (step A854; N), the process proceeds to step A856. . In this case, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. If it is the start of an odd round (step A854; Y), stop data for the lever solenoid is set (step A855), and the process proceeds to step A856. In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

  After that, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening release data is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A856), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the big winning opening release data is acquired and hitting the special drawing. Save in the control pointer area (step A857). Further, a hit end pointer value corresponding to the big prize opening release data is acquired and saved in the special pointer end pointer area (step A858), and it is determined whether the odd number round is started (step A859).

  If it is not the start of the odd round (step A859; N), the special winning opening open process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A860), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. If it is the start of an odd round (step A859; Y), a special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A861), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

  In step A842, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A843 is not performed. Anyway. That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a specific area (in which a game ball can flow into the inside, which can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state where a game ball can win a game) A first special variable prize-winning device 38 having a probability changing operation area 38h), a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state, and an open state in which a game ball can be won; 2 special variation winning device 39, and the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific region, and the game control means does not flow into the specific region. A gaming state advantageous to the player can occur after the end of the special gaming state. In a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are provided in each round. And the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to be alternately opened every round by changing the special variable winning device that is opened every round. When starting the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. It means waiting for the start of the round.

  Therefore, since it waits for the start of the round which opens the 1st special variation prize-winning apparatus 38 until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into a specific field, fairness of a game can be secured. .

  In addition, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second special variation winning device 39 are discharged. Regardless of whether or not it is to start the round. Therefore, when opening the second special variable winning device 39 that does not include the specific area, the special game state can be quickly digested because it is opened without confirming the discharge.

  Further, in step A841, it may be determined whether or not the specific round is started, and it may be confirmed whether or not the remaining sphere counter is 0 only when the specific round is started. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result (Game control device 100) and a specific region (probability change operation region) that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win, 38h), and a second special variation that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and does not have a specific area. And the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball that has won the first special variable prize-winning device 38 flows into the specific area, and the game control means plays a game more than when the game ball does not flow into the specific area. Can be generated after the end of the special gaming state. In a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are used in each round. While either one is opened and the special variable winning device that is opened for each round is changed, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to open alternately for each round. In the special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 is controlled to be executed a plurality of rounds, and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round among the plurality of rounds. It is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variation winning device 38 has flowed into the specific area, and when starting the specific round, The game balls that may be flowing into the specific region in the device 38 is not present may be waiting for the start of the specific round until acknowledged. By doing so, the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, in step A841, it is determined whether it is the start of the specific round or the first special variable winning device 38 that is opened next to the specific round, and the remaining ball counter is 0 only when it is the start of these rounds. You may make it confirm. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened after the specific round, the game control means (game control device 100) has a specific area (probability changing operation) in the first special variable winning device 38. You may make it wait for the start of the said round until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into area | region 38h). In this way, since it waits until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed in the specific round has flowed into the specific area, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited. However, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special gaming state may be waited. In other words, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. You may make it wait for the start of a special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variation winning device 38 is not released until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 other than the specific round, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the round. Also good. Further, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the specific round is other than the first round and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (it may be only at the start of the specific round) A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may wait for the start and may be rounds for releasing the second special variable winning device 39. By doing in this way, sufficient time can be ensured before the start of a specific round, and it can be set as the state by which the remaining ball | bowl was discharged | emitted reliably. Furthermore, a plurality of consecutive rounds immediately after the specific round may be rounds that open the second special variable winning device 39.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 60 shows the transition process setting process 1 (step A860) during the big prize opening opening in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A871), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A872). After that, the information on the area for counting the number of winning prizes for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A873), and a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening (for example, the signal for operating the special electric accessory 1 is ON) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Then, the upper prize winning port ON data is saved in the special prize opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper big prize opening operating information is saved in the upper prize winning state flag area (step A876). Next, the upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A877), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step A878), and the upper university winning mouth remaining ball is saved. The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening is completed.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A861). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 881), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A882). After that, the information on the area for the number of the big prize winning counts for storing the number of winning prizes at the big prize winning opening is cleared (step A883), and the signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A884).

  Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the lower big prize opening operating information is saved in the lower big prize opening state flag area (step A886). Next, the lower prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A887), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower major winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step A888). The process timer area is cleared to 0 (step A 889), and the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening is completed.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A16) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special winning opening opening process, it is first determined whether or not the special winning opening data is a pattern for opening and closing (step A901). The pattern that opens and closes is an opening pattern that opens and closes during one round, and in this embodiment is a lower V opening (see FIG. 8). If the winning opening data is a pattern for opening and closing (step A901; Y), the control pointer is loaded and prepared per special figure (step A902), and the loaded value is greater than or equal to the end pointer value per special figure. It is determined whether it exists (step A903).

  When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; N), that is, when the opening / closing operation is still performed in the currently executed round, the value of the middle control pointer area per special figure is incremented by +1. It is updated (step A904), a big hit movement transition setting process is performed (step A905), and the big winning opening opening process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the big hit operation transition setting process, a branch process using the middle control pointer per special figure is performed (step A921). When the value of the control pointer per special figure is 0, the wait time (2700 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A922), and the first special variable winning device 38 is closed. Next, the lower big prize opening off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A923), and the big hit action transition setting process is completed.

  If the value of the control pointer during special figure is 1, the big special V second half opening time (25000 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A924), and the first special variable winning device 38 is In order to enter the open state, the lower prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step A925). Then, a long opening command is prepared (step A926), an effect command setting process is performed (step A927), and the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. As a result, a long opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the second half of the lower V opening, and the effect control device 300 starts an effect of long opening based on this command.

  Returning to FIG. 62, when the special winning opening data is not a pattern for opening and closing (step A901; N), or when the loaded value is greater than or equal to the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; Y), The current round number in the special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A906).

  If it is not the final round (step A906; N), the special winning opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, 300ms, 900ms, 1300ms, or 2700ms) are saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A907), an interval command is prepared (Step A908), and an effect command setting process is performed (Step A909). Further, the process number is set to “3” for the fanfare / interval process (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

  If it is the final round (step A906; Y), the winning game opening data and the remaining ball processing time (in this case, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A911), an ending command is prepared (Step A912), and an effect command setting process is performed (Step A913). Furthermore, the processing number is set to “5” for the winning ball remaining ball processing (step A914), and the process proceeds to step A915.

  Then, the big winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening release data and the number of rounds is saved in the big winning opening remaining ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, if the round to be finished is a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, the initial value of the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. When the round to be finished is a round for releasing the second special variable winning device 39, the initial value of the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer area.

  Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A916), and the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. The off data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A917), and the large winning opening releasing process is terminated. In step A916, the off data of the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b are set, but only the off data of the big prize opening solenoid of the special variable winning device being opened is set. You may do it.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the big winning opening remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is zero ( In step A951), if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated. In other words, the process does not shift from the big winning opening remaining ball processing until all the game balls in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, so that the special gaming state is not terminated.

  If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A951; Y), “6” is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A952), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A952). Step A953). Thereafter, an ending time (in this case, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is set and saved in the special game process timer area (step A954).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning-outs to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A955), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A956). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A957). Then, the information of the special winning opening release information area for storing the special winning opening release information determination flag is cleared (step A956), and the control pointer area is cleared per special figure (step A957). The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) may flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region 38h) in the first special variation winning device 38 when ending the special game state. This means that the special game state is not terminated until it is confirmed that there is no ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining until the next special game state, and to ensure the fairness of the game. In step A951, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. May be. That is, the special game state may be terminated after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and the current special game state is based on a hit with high probability and short time. (Step A1002). When the special game state this time is not based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation.

  When the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1003; N), information on the start of the short time mode B is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006. In addition, when the special game state this time is based on a hit with a high probability & short time (step A1002; Y), or when the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game Information on the start of the time reduction mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

  Then, it is determined whether there is probability change operation region passage information set when a game ball flows into the probability change operation region 38h (step A1006). When there is no probability change operation region passage information (step A1006; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state is not obtained. Also, if there is probability variation operating area passage information (step A1006; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1008), and the information prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is set to the ST mode (ST mode A Or it replaces with B) (step A1009), and transfers to step A1010. In this case, a high probability state is obtained. That is, when a game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h regardless of the big hit symbol, a high probability state is set.

  Thereafter, an effect mode information address table is set (step A1010), and an address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from this information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012), and the number of games in the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012). A1013), the next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved (step A1014). Furthermore, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1016).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change operation region irregular passing, which is the inflow of the game ball into the probability change operation region 38h in the special game state based on the big hit symbol which is not the V easy symbol (step A1017). Then, when the probability variation operating region is not irregularly passed (step A1017; N), the process proceeds to step A1019. If the probability variation operating region is irregular passing (step A1017; Y), the irregularity variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A1019), and a probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands that include production mode information in either “high probability / short time” or “low probability / short time”, and the probability variable operation region passes irregularly. In the case of, irregular probability variation information is added. Then, a game number command corresponding to the number of games is prepared (step A1020), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A1021).

  Next, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1023). After that, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1024). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

  Subsequently, the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1027). The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information in the probability changing operation area passing information area is cleared (step A1029), the information in the special-purpose game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1030), and the big hit ending process is ended.

  When the special game state this time is based on the high probability state or the short time state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence / absence of the probability variation operation region passage information. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, it becomes a V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, and when it is a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, all become a V easy symbol. In the high probability state or in the short-time state, the game proceeds with a right stroke, so only the special figure 2 variable display game is basically executed, and all the big hits in the high-probability state and the short-time state are V easy symbols. Should be. However, when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory that existed when the big hit occurred, it does not become a V easy symbol at a predetermined rate even though it is in a high probability state or a short time state. There is.

  Players who are not familiar with game content may understand that all jackpots during high-probability and short-time states will be V easy symbols, and may have distrust of not being in ST mode. Such a distrust can be prevented by making a transition to the ST mode in the case of a big hit during a high probability state or a short time state. Since the ST mode is terminated without generating a big hit at a predetermined rate even in a high probability state, even if the ST mode is set in a low probability state, the ST mode does not cause a big hit, and thus the ST mode is uncomfortable. Will not occur.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, a signal related to the start of low probability & short time (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

  Next, a number with a short time is saved in the game state display number area (step A1043), a high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1044), and the special game mode flag area is specially saved. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A1045). Thereafter, the high probability variation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction variation count area (step A1047), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). Since the signal related to the start of time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, a signal related to the start of high probability & short time (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time The shortened state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

  Next, a number with a short time is saved in the game state display number area (step A1053), a high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1054), and a special game mode flag area is specially saved. The flag with high probability & short time is saved (step A1055). Thereafter, the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1056), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time shortening variation number area (step A1057), and the jackpot end setting is set. Processing 2 ends. Note that while the game is progressing by right-handed during the short-running state, it is instructed to right-hand from the special gaming state, so in the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2, settings relating to instructing right-handed are performed. Absent.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (short-time state) for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. Then, in the specific gaming state, the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled so as to make it easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state, and more than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. The variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game, and the usual figure variation display game is configured to be shortened. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a high probability state generating means capable of generating a high probability state (probability variation state) over a predetermined period after the special game state ends.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step A23) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (here, -1) (step A1101). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A1103). .

  If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. When the lever solenoid control timer reaches 0 (step A1103; Y), a lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and a table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1107), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, and the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON / OFF as shown in FIGS. The validity / invalidity of the switch 38d is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, −1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

[PB gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the PB gate switch monitoring process (step A5) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the PB gate switch monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is an input from the PB gate changeover switch (step A1031). The process ends. If there is an input from the PB gate changeover switch (step A1031; Y), the PB input mode number is switched between the manual input mode and the auto input mode (step A1032). That is, in the case of the manual input mode, the PB input mode number (for example, 0) of the auto input mode is set. In the case of the auto input mode, the manual input mode PB input mode number (for example, 1) is set.

  Next, a PB input mode information command corresponding to the PB input mode number is prepared (step A1033), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A1034). Thereby, the information of the PB input mode set with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 is transmitted, and the production | generation control apparatus 300 performs the process of displaying a mode name on the display apparatus 41 based on this information. Then, it is determined whether the PB input mode number is a manual input mode number (step A1035).

  If the PB input mode number is not a manual input mode number (step A1035; N), that is, if it is an auto input mode number, an initial value (500 ms in this case) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A1036). The PB command number area is cleared to 0 (step A1037), and the PB gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the PB input mode number is the manual input mode number (step A1035; Y), 1 is saved in the PB command number area (step A1038), and the PB command corresponding to the PB command number (here, the PB off command) Is prepared (step A1039). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A1040), and the PB gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[PB input command editing processing]
Next, details of the PB input command editing process (step A24) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the PB input command editing process, it is first determined whether or not the auto input mode is in effect (step A1051). If not in the auto input mode (step A1051; N), that is, the manual input mode is set. In this case, the PB input command editing process is terminated. If the automatic input mode is being used (step A1051; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure change display game is changing (step A1052).

  If the special figure change display game is not changing (step A1052; N), the PB input command editing process is terminated. When the special figure change display game is changing (step A1052; Y), if the PB command control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A1053), and whether the PB command control timer has expired (0) (Step A1054).

  If the PB command control timer has not expired (step A1054; N), the PB input command editing process is terminated. If the PB command control timer expires (step A1054; Y), a PB command corresponding to the PB command number is prepared (step A1055), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A1056). Then, the initial value (500 ms in this case) is saved in the PB command control timer area (step A1057), the PB command number is updated by 1 (step A1059), and the PB input command editing process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, in the auto input mode, the PB on command for instructing the effect control device 300 to be regarded as a state in which the operation means is operated, and the PB off for instructing to be regarded as a state in which the operation means is not operated. Commands are sent alternately. The PB command control timer is a timer that manages the interval for transmitting the PB on command and the PB off command, and the PB command number is information that defines which of the PB on command and the PB off command is transmitted. The PB command number area is configured to be updated (looped) in the range of 0 to 255. A PB on command is transmitted when the number is even (including 0 in this case), and a PB off command is transmitted when the number is odd. It has come to be.

  In this way, by alternately transmitting the PB on command and the PB off command, the effect control device 300 proceeds with the effect as if the operation means is operated intermittently. That is, the PB command (PB off command and PB off command) makes a pseudo operation command that makes it possible to change the effect in the same manner as when an operation signal based on the operation of the operation means is input. Also, a start command is issued to instruct the PB on command to be regarded as the start of operation of the operating means, and an end command is issued to instruct the PB off command to be regarded as the end of operation of the operating means.

  The operation means includes an effect button 25 that receives a pressing operation input from a player and a touch panel 29 that receives a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to receive contact operation inputs separately for the eight regions. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not there is an operation input for each of these nine operation inputs. However, when the PB on command is received, all nine operation inputs are in a state in which there is an operation input. Therefore, when a PB off command is received, all nine operation inputs are regarded as having no operation input.

  FIG. 71 shows the output mode of the PB command in the auto input mode. When variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, an initial value (500 ms in this case) is set in the PB command control timer area (t111), and when the time is up, a PB on command is transmitted (t112). At this time, an initial value (500 ms in this case) is set in the PB command control timer area (t112), and when the time is up, a PB off command is transmitted (t113). Thereafter, every time a predetermined time (in this case, 500 ms) elapses, a PB on command and a PB off command are alternately transmitted. When the variation display of the special figure variation display game is finished, the PB off command is transmitted regardless of the value of the PB command control timer and the type of the PB command transmitted immediately before (t117).

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

  Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005). When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 73 shows a symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special symbol game process, and a symbol variation control process (step B15) in the normal game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

  When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  When the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the target flashing timer area (step A2106), and the control target The variable symbol number is updated by +1 (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

  In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

  If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed. Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

  If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed. If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 74 (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B14) B15) is performed and the usual game process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed game (for example, during a big hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)) (step B102). .

  When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of ordinary drawings held is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, when it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (eg, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the hit end pointer value (in this case, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal pointer end pointer area and saved in the normal pointer pointer control area (step B205). Then, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

  Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the usual-day routine process, first, it is determined whether the number of usual-pending holds is “0” (step B301). ) Sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B322), and saves the process number in the normal figure game process number area (step B323). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  In addition, when the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1). The per-random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per-symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability of the hit result in the normal variation display game is in the high probability of being higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability of normal error), that is, in the short time state. (Step B303).

  If the ordinary figure is not in high probability (step B303; N), a lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary figure low probability is set (step B304), and if the ordinary figure is in high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B305). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), that is, if it is out of step, step B308 Migrate to

  If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307). If the value of the winning random number is less than the step lower limit determination value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a miss, the slip information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and the slippage stop symbol number is set (step B308). B309), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information region (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol region (step B314).

  On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311). A winning stop symbol number corresponding to the winning symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stopping symbol information corresponding to the stopping symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stopping symbol information area (step B313), The number is saved in the usual figure stop symbol area (step B314). Note that in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols: a hit symbol 1 that becomes an open pattern 1 and a hit symbol 2 that becomes an open pattern 2.

  In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”. Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

  After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315). Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set and saved in the usual game process timer area (step B320). Here, as the variation time, 500 ms is selected at 200/256, 1500 ms is selected at 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256. After that, a normal chart transition process transition setting process (step B321) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
In FIG. 78, the process transition setting process (step B321) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process is shown. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B341). Step B342). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 variation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343) to indicate that the universal variation display game is changing. The changing flag is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (step B344).

  Then, the flashing control timer initial value (100 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general-purpose display 74, is saved in the general-purpose flashing control timer area (step B345), and is initially stored in the general-purpose variable symbol number area The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the processing for setting the transition to the normal fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the process of changing the normal map, first, the process number is set to “2” as the setting process for shifting to the process of displaying the normal map (step B411), and the process number is set to the normal game process number. Save in the area (step B412). After that, the normal time display time (for example, 600 milliseconds) which is the display time of the result of the normal time fluctuation display game on the normal time display 74 is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (step B413), A signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is entered in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B415), and the process during normal map change ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the win flag is not hit information (step B503; N), “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B515), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B516). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal diagram display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer value (here, 0 and 5) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information is set. Is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B505). Next, a hit end pointer value (in this case, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the usual figure end pointer area (step B506), and corresponds to the usual figure stop symbol information. The normal power open time (in this case, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B507).

Thereafter, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal game process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, a normal signal per normal symbol ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal ON) are entered in the test signal output data area. Save (step B510).
Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B511), and the ordinary electric power count number for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is stored. The information on the area is cleared (step B512), and the information on the illegal power prize winning area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (the fraud monitoring out-of-flight monitoring period flag) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the normal diagram is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal operation switching setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map. Also, if the value of the control pointer during normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the process shifts to normal operation without performing the process of updating the normal process control pointer area by 1 in step B603. A setting process (step B604) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611). Note that the value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and the value before +1 update in step B603.

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2 or 5, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is blocked. The later wait time (300 ms in this case) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (step B613). Then, the ordinary electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is released. The time of normal power release (1700 ms in this case) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B615), the normal operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B616 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the ordinary power that is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is The opening time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B616), and the on-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B617) to turn on the general-purpose solenoid 37c. The electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B618 to complete the open control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process. “4” is set (step B618). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B619), and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time (600 ms in this case) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B621), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 83 shows the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. FIG. 83 (a) shows a case where the result is hit symbol 1 (open pattern 1). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t81) and the normal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t82), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.

  In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, opening for 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) and closing for 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are performed alternately. When the third release is completed (t87), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t87 to t88), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t88 to t89). When the ending time is over (t89), the hit state is over, and a new custom fluctuation display game can be executed.

  FIG. 83 (b) shows a case where the result is hit symbol 2 (open pattern 2). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t91) and the normal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t92), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened. In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, the opening of 2600 ms (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) is performed with the closing of 300 ms (t93 to t94). When the second opening is completed (t95), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t95 to t96), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t96 to t97). When the ending time is over (t97), the winning state is over, and a new custom fluctuation display game can be executed.

  If a predetermined number (6 in this case) of game balls wins the normal variation winning device 37 regardless of the opening pattern, the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is terminated at that time, and the remaining ball processing It will be time.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in the ordinary power remaining ball process, first, a process number “5” related to the end process per ordinary figure is set (step B711), and the process number is saved in the ordinary game process number area (step B711). Step B712).

  Next, the usual figure ending time (here, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the usual figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, a signal indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 1 is in operation) OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B716), the normal call end pointer area is cleared (step B717), and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the normal figure end process, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B811). B812).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. To save the flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and finish the process for ending the normal figure.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 75, the first game state display unit 76, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 77, the third gaming state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, and a blinking cycle of 128 milliseconds is created.

  If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step S503) If it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the general-purpose hold number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is obtained from the set number of reserved general map display table, and is saved in the segment area for the reserved general map display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S508). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 hold indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511). When the output on timing is not reached (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 hold indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S513). Further, a round display table in which a display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and a segment for the round display unit provided in the RAM 111C. Save in the area (step S515).

  Next, a gaming state display table 1 is set in which a display mode is defined in the first gaming state display unit 76 that is turned on when a time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state (step S516). The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 76 made up of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).

  After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 77 for notifying that the right-handed game state is more advantageous than the left-handed game is defined (step S518). Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 77 made up of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left-handed) and right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits and during normal power support). It is configured to light up.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag that is turned on when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is turned on. If so (step S520; Y), the off-data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area, and the segment LED editing process ends.

[Abnormal emission monitoring processing]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of game balls existing for each of the upper flow path 38j and the lower flow path 38k is managed, and an abnormal discharge error is detected when discharge is detected even though the existing game balls are zero. Processing related to processing and cancellation of abnormal discharge errors.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). If an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. judge. If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step S552). If there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. To do. In addition, when there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S554). If there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. When there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S555), and the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated. It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565, and processing is performed when an abnormality occurs. In the process when an abnormality occurs, an abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, an input is made to the probability change operation region switch 38d that detects a game ball flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. Since there is a case, processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S557), and it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. If there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects a game ball flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. If this is the case, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S561), and it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is 0, an input is input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k. Since there is a case, processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by -1 (step S561), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, no abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, an abnormal discharge release flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge release command is prepared (step S571), and the process proceeds to step S572.

  On the other hand, if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the initialization switch 112 (step S567). If there is no input (step S567; N), abnormal discharge is detected. The monitoring process ends. In this case, the state where the abnormal discharge error is occurring continues. If there is an input to the initialization switch (step S567; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S568) and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S567) as a process of canceling the abnormal discharge error. S569). Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancel flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancel command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

  If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area does not match the prepared flag (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S573). S574). Thereby, either the abnormal discharge occurrence command or the abnormal discharge cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring when the abnormal discharge occurrence command is received. Since the abnormal discharge error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the performance is also stopped, and the error notification is continuously performed while the abnormal discharge error occurs. In addition, when the abnormal discharge cancel command is received, the game effect is resumed, and the notification that an abnormal discharge error is occurring is terminated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the new flag is an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574). If the new flag is not an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. If it is an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is released based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress. If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S576; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. If the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), an effect command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. Although the game is resumed when the abnormality occurrence error is released, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in another process when the customer waiting demo state is resumed. By sending a customer waiting demo command, the production of the customer waiting demo state is started.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is started or ended.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step S602), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” → “Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board fraud, the on-board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not made, a command for terminating the board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708). It is determined whether it matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y” → “Step S707” → “Step S708” → “Step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in each processing and set it in an output buffer is performed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the external information editing process, it is first determined whether or not a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step S751). In step S751; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S752), and the process proceeds to step S754. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step S751; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the process proceeds to step S754.

  If the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S754; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S755; N), the door / frame opening signal off-data is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step S756), save the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S757), and proceed to the process of step S760. On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

  If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 ( Step S760). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S761; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), and step S763 is performed. Move on to processing. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S762 is not performed and the process of step S763 is performed. Transition.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91, anomaly detection error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper university prize mouth fraud, lower university prize mouth fraud, general electric fraud and vibration If at least one fraud is occurring (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the ON signal of the security signal is stored. Is saved in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, any of abnormal detection error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper university prize opening fraud, lower university prize opening fraud, general electric fraud and vibration fraud If not (N in all of steps S763 to S772), the process proceeds to step S774. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; N) and there is no probability variation operating region abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is the probability variation operating region abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data region (step S776). ), The process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process (step S778) for editing a winning signal at the start opening is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special-figure display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S779). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S780).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S780; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S781, the external information editing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S780; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S781), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is selected from the time of the main prize ball signal being on (for example, high level) (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). The on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main winning ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is sent), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times set.
For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a winning is made during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurate by the main winning ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S778) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the start port signal editing process, first, unless the start port signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the time of the ON state (for example, high level) of the start port signal (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). It is an on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). Here, the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 89 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 94, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect operation unit 550 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the production operation unit 550 is read in the timer interrupt process. In this production button input process, when there is an input from the production operation unit 550, a process for changing the production content is performed.

Next, hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting of changeable range such as brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal, setting of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by player, and setting to enable production (Step C10).
Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, a customer waiting demo editing process (step C13) for controlling the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the game value on the effect The effect point control process (step C14) which performs the process regarding the point which is is performed.

  Next, an effect display editing process (step C15) for setting the progress of the effect and editing the drawing command is performed, and the drawing command preparation end is set (step C16). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem. The generation of an ambiguous screen (described later) is performed in the effect display editing process (step C15).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is frame switching timing (step C17). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C20 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), a screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C19) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc. C20), a movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 95 shows the hall / player setting mode process (step C10) in the main process described above. In this hall / player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode is in a state where information is set on the game store side (step C51). When the hall setting mode is in effect, the hall setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the hall setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag.
If it is determined that the hall setting mode is being executed (step C51; Y), the process proceeds to step C56.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the hole setting mode (step C51; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which information is set (step C52). When the player setting mode is in effect, the player setting mode flag is set, and whether or not the player setting mode is in can be determined by the presence or absence of this flag.

If it is determined that the player setting mode is in effect (step C52; Y), the process proceeds to step C70.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the player setting mode is not in effect (step C52; N), it is determined whether the start condition for the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C53). Here, the start condition of the hall setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation unit 550 is pressed twice while waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened.
When it is determined that the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C53; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C54), and the flag in the hole setting mode is set (step C55). The process proceeds to step C56.

In step C56, hall volume adjustment processing (step C56) is performed in which the setting of the volume changeable range is performed based on the operation input.
Next, hall LED brightness adjustment processing (step C57) for setting the changeable range of LED brightness based on the operation input is performed.
In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here.

Next, liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (step C58) for setting the liquid crystal luminance based on the operation input, and power saving for setting whether or not to enter the power saving state when the game has not been performed for a predetermined time based on the operation input A setting process (step C59) and a logo color setting process (step C60) for setting a display color of the frame decoration device 18 such as a logo provided on the outside of the projecting portion of the frame based on the operation input are performed. In the power saving setting process (step C59), it is set whether or not the power saving setting is valid when the game is not performed for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the volume, LED luminance, and liquid crystal luminance at the time of power saving setting may be set for each hall and for each gaming machine as well as whether or not to shift to the power saving state. In addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether or not to move the movable accessory during power saving.
Next, it is determined whether there has been a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C61).

If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C61; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there has been a setting confirmation operation input (step C61; Y), it is determined whether the input is a confirmation operation input at the time of factory shipment (step C62). The confirmation operation input includes a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processes from Step C56 to C60 and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which one has been performed.

If it is determined that the input is not a finalizing operation input at the time of factory shipment (step C62; N), that is, if it is a finalizing operation input for determining the information set in the processes from step C56 to C60, the process starts from step C56. The determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM using the information set in the processes up to C60 as the determined information (step C64).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input is a definite operation input at the factory default setting (step C62; Y), the factory default setting process (step C63) is performed, and the information set by the processes from step C56 to C60. And the initial value at the time of factory shipment is set as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C64). Thereby, initial setting values (setting values such as volume, LED luminance, liquid crystal luminance, etc.) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323.
Next, the end of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C65), the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step C66), and the hole / player setting mode process is ended.

When it is determined that the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C53; N), it is determined whether the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C67). The starting condition of the player setting mode here is, for example, that the effect operation unit 550 is pressed once during a waiting state in which a special figure fluctuation display game or a normal figure fluctuation display game is not executed. .
If it is determined that the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (step C67; N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (step C67; Y), the player drawing mode screen drawing start is set (step C68), and the player setting mode flag is set. (Step C69).

Next, the player volume adjustment process (step C70) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C56), and the change set in the hall LED adjustment process (step C57). A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C71) for changing the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the possible range is performed. Next, an effect customization process (step C72) for changing the effect contents based on the operation input is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C73).
If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C73: N), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a setting confirmation operation input has been made (step C73: Y), the information set in the processing of steps C70, C71, and C72 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the player setting mode is set. Is finished (step C74), the player setting mode flag is cleared (step C75), and the hall / player setting mode processing is ended. Thereby, it changes to the brightness | luminance of LED, the volume, and the content of production which the player set.

Further, since the player setting data may be erased, the player setting data is not written in the backup RAM (FeRAM 323) but is stored in the RAM 322. However, the player setting data may be stored in the FeRAM 323.
Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power-off time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 at the time of power-on, and the player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power-off time Whether or not to store the hole set value data may be determined. For example, if the power cut-off time is within a predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data, but is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short interruption or error. Then, it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 96 shows the received command check process (step C12) in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C101). It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C102). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C102; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the command reception number is not 0 (step C102; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the command reception number (step C103).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C104), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C105), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C106). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C106 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C106; N), the process returns to step C104. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C106; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C107), and the received command analysis process (step C108) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C109), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C110). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C110; N), the process returns to step C107. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C110; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 97 shows the received command analysis process (step C108) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C111), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C112, step C113). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C112; Y, step C113; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C114).

  Further, when it is determined in step C112 and step C113 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C112; N, step C113; N), or when it is determined in step C114 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination ( In step C114; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C114 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C114; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C115). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C115; Y), the variable command processing (step C116) is performed, the continuous number counter is updated by +1 (step C117), and the received command End the analysis process.

  The continuous number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the special figure variation display game has continued without entering the customer waiting state. The value of this counter is displayed on the display device 41. It should be noted that every time the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 10), a display emphasizing that may be performed. In addition, it is possible to memorize the maximum number of consecutive times, which is the number of consecutive special figure variation display games, without being in the customer waiting state in the gaming machine, and to emphasize that when the maximum number of consecutive times is updated May be performed. Further, in the customer waiting state, the immediately preceding continuous count or the maximum continuous count may be displayed so that the player can refer to it when selecting a gaming machine.

  If it is determined in step C115 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C115; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C118). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the big hit effect (fanfare screen, round screen, display of long opening effect, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C118; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C119) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C118 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C118; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C120). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C120; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C121) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C120 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C120; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C122). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / unauthorized command, a model designation command, a PB command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C122; Y), the single command processing (step C123) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C122 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C122; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C124). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol commands (step C124; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C125) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C124 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C124; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read variation command (step C126). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C126; Y), prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C127) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C126 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C126; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 98 shows the jackpot command processing (step C119) in the received command analysis processing described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a fanfare (step C141). When it is determined that MODE is a fanfare (fanfare command) (step C141; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting an effect during the fanfare is performed (step C142), and the big hit command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not a fanfare (step C141; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C143).

  If it is determined that the MODE is a round (round command) (step C143; Y), it is determined whether the short is other than the specific round (here 1R) (lower short open or upper short open) (step S143). C144). If it is a short-circuit opening other than the specific round (step C144; Y), the process proceeds to step C148 to set an effect during the round. That is, in a short opening other than a specific round (lower short opening or upper short opening), a short opening effect is started as an effect during the round in response to reception of the round command.

  If it is not a short release other than a specific round (step C144; N), that is, if an upper long release, a lower V release, a lower long release, or a lower short release in a specific round, round command information is stored ( Step C145), the jackpot command processing is terminated. In the process of storing round command information (step C145), the round command itself may be stored, or information converted into information such as the number of rounds may be stored. In this case, the setting of the effect during the round is not performed here. If it is determined that the MODE is not a round (step C143; N), it is determined whether the MODE is long open (step C146).

  When it is determined that MODE is long open (long open command) (step C146; Y), round command information is read (step C147), and round effect setting processing for setting effects during the round is performed (step C148). ), An accessory position confirmation process is performed (step C149), and the jackpot command process is terminated. In other words, in the case of upper long opening, lower V opening, lower long opening, or lower short opening in a specific round, a long opening effect is started as an effect during the round in response to reception of the long opening command. . If it is determined that MODE is not long open (step C146; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C150).

  If it is determined that MODE is an interval (interval command) (step C150; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C151), and the jackpot command process is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not an interval (step C150; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an ending (step C152).

  When it is determined that MODE is an ending (ending command) (step C152; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an effect during ending is performed (step C153), and the jackpot command process is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not ending (step C152; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.

  As described above, the effect of starting the long release based on the reception of the long release command is started, so that even when the execution state of the special game state is changed in the development process of the gaming machine, the effect control device 300 can perform the long release. It is not necessary to change the setting of the timing for starting the production. In addition, although the execution mode of the special game state is often different for the same model series, there is no need to take different measures for setting the timing for starting the long open effect in the effect control device 300 for each model. You can use the same program as it is. In many cases, so-called feather-type gaming machines have a long opening and a short opening as a round execution mode in a special gaming state, but in such a gaming machine, a long opening command is issued only when the opening is long. 300, and the effect control device 300 can start the effect of long opening with the reception of the long opening command.

  FIG. 99 shows the execution mode of a special gaming state with a probability big hit (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation) in the upper row, and a special game in the case of 5R normal in the normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal variation). The state execution mode is shown. Moreover, the execution mode of the production common to both special game states is shown in the middle row.

  When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit and the stop time for displaying the result is over, the special game state is started (t151). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits a fanfare command to the effect control device 300. With the start of the special game state, the fanfare time (t151 to t152) is reached. When the fanfare time is over, the first round is started (t152). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the first round to the effect control device 300. In the case of the probable big hit, the first round is opened at the lower V, so the first special variable winning device 38 is first opened for a short time (t152 to t153). Thereafter, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed for a predetermined time (t153 to t154), and then the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time (t154 to t155). The game control device 100 transmits a long release command to the effect control device 300 at the start of the long-time release, which is the second release.

  Thereafter, when the first round is completed, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t155), and the interval time is reached (t155 to t156). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300. When the interval time ends, the second round is started. The second round is an upper long release, and the game control device 100 transmits a round command and a long release command corresponding to the second round to the effect control device 300 at the start of the land.

  The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect in response to the reception of the fanfare command (t151), and this fanfare effect is continued until the second opening of the first round is started (t154). Then, in response to the reception of the long opening command transmitted at the start of the long opening which is the second opening, the long opening effect is started (t154). The effect of long release is continued until the reception of the interval command (t155), and the interval effect is started with the reception of the interval command (t155). Thereafter, the interval effect is ended with the reception of the round command (t156), and the effect of the round is started. Here, since the long release command is received, the long release effect is started (t156).

  In the case of a normal jackpot, the same process as in the case of a probabilistic jackpot is made until the end of the fanfare time. Normally, in the case of big hit, the first round is a short short opening, so the first round ends when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time (t152 to t153) with the start of the first round. Therefore, when the short opening of the first special variable winning device 38 ends, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t153), and the interval time is reached (t153 to t154).

  Note that the opening of the lower short circuit in the first round of normal big hits constitutes the first execution mode, and the opening of the lower V in the first round of the above-mentioned probability variation big hits is a game to a specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) than in the first execution mode. A second execution mode in which the inflow of the sphere is easy and the execution period is longer than that of the first execution mode is formed.

  When the interval time ends, the second round is started. In the case of a 5R normal big hit, the second round is an upper long release, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command and a long release command corresponding to the second round to the effect control device 300. Thereafter, when the second round is completed, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed (t155), and the interval time is reached (t155 to t156). At this time, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300. When the interval time ends, the third round is started. The third round is a lower long release, and the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the third round and a long release command to the effect control device 300 at the start of the round.

  The effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect in response to the reception of the fanfare command (t151), and this fanfare effect is continued until the end of the first round (t154). Then, with the reception of the long opening command transmitted at the start of the second round, the long opening effect is started (t154). The effect of long release is continued until the reception of the interval command (t155), and the interval effect is started with the reception of the interval command (t155). Thereafter, the interval effect is ended with the reception of the round command (t156), and the effect of the round is started. Here, since the long release command is received, the long release effect is started (t156).

  In other words, the operation and performance of the special variable winning device is almost the same for the probability big hit and the normal big hit, making it difficult for the player to distinguish. The discouragement can be reduced. However, until the end of the fanfare performance, the operation and performance of the special variable prize winning device are completely the same, but the special variable prize winning device that is released at t154 to t155, which is the long opening effect, is different, so the probability variable big hit and the normal big hit are It is also possible to distinguish.

  Even in the case of 4R normal, the same behavior as in the case of other big hits is obtained until the start of the second round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 100, if the second round (t154 to t155) in the normal big hit is set to the lower long opening, and the subsequent opening is alternately opened to the upper long opening and the lower long opening, the special gaming state Until the end, the operation and effect of the special variable prize winning device become completely the same behavior, and can be made more difficult to distinguish. For example, for 5R normal and 4R probability changes, if 5R normal 2R is opened with the lower long open, 3R opened with the upper long open, 4R opened with the lower long open, and 5R opened with the upper long opened, the same behavior as the 4R probability changed becomes difficult to distinguish. That is, since the big jackpot does not have a long opening in a specific round, it is possible to have the same behavior as the probability variable big hit with one round.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a specific area (in which a game ball can flow into the inside, which can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state where a game ball can win a game) A special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) having a probability variation operating region 38h), and the game control means is configured to play a game based on the flow of game balls that have won the special variation winning device into the specific region. A gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than if the ball did not flow into the specific area can occur after the end of the special gaming state, and the first of the multiple rounds to open the special variable winning device It is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable prize winning device has flowed into the specific area, and there are multiple types of special results, and the execution mode of the first round according to the type of the special results As one of the first execution mode and the second execution mode in which a game ball can easily flow into the specific area and has a longer execution period than the first execution mode, In the case of the first execution mode, the production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production of the game is a predetermined value that can be executed over a period from the start of the special game state to the start of the second round. In the case of the second execution mode, after the fanfare effect is executed, the effect corresponding to the first round is executed. Therefore, the period during which it is difficult to enter the specific area due to the fanfare effect can be made inconspicuous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 101, the fanfare time can be differentiated between the probable big hit (t161 to t162) and the normal big hit (t161 to t163) to distinguish the probable big hit from the normal big hit. Also good. In other words, the game control means (game control device 100) has a special variable prize device (first device) for a predetermined opening time in a period in which a predetermined fanfare effect is executed in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode. The special variable prize winning device 38) is configured to be released, and the special variable prize winning device during the period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed is the same in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode. In the first execution mode and the second execution mode, the time from the start of the special gaming state to the start of release may be different. This makes it possible for a player who continues to play the gaming machine to determine whether it is difficult to enter the specific area, and whether it is difficult to enter the specific area. It is possible to have an interest in determining whether or not, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 102 shows single-shot command processing (step C123) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is for specifying a model (step C171). If it is determined that the MODE is for specifying a model (step C171; Y), a model setting process (step C172) for setting the model is performed, and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE does not specify a model (step C171; N), it is determined whether MODE is a command for RAM initialization (step C173).

  If it is determined in step C173 that MODE is for instructing RAM initialization (step C173; Y), the RAM initialization for executing processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100 is executed. Is performed (step C174), a customer waiting demo command reception flag is set (step C175), an accessory position confirmation process (step C176) is performed, and the one-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE does not command RAM initialization (step C173; N), it is determined whether the MODE commands power failure recovery (step C177).

  If it is determined in step C177 that MODE is a command to restore power failure (step C177; Y), power failure recovery setting processing (step C178) for executing processing related to power failure recovery is performed, and single command processing is performed. Exit. If it is determined that the MODE does not command a power failure recovery (step C177; N), it is determined whether the MODE commands a customer waiting demonstration (step C179).

  If it is determined in step C179 that the MODE is to command a customer waiting demo (step C179; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal customer waiting demo command (step C180). If it is determined that the command is not a normal customer waiting demo command (step C180; N), the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the command is a normal customer waiting demo command (step C180; Y), a customer waiting demo command reception flag is set (step C181), and an accessory position confirmation process (step C182) is performed. In the accessory position confirmation process (steps C149 and C182), it is confirmed whether or not the accessory is in the normal position. If the accessory is not in the normal position, a setting is made to return the position of the accessory to the normal position. Further, the continuous number counter that is a counter for counting the number of times that the special figure variation display game is continued without entering the customer waiting state is cleared to 0 (step C183), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

  As a result, the number of times that the special figure variation display game has continued without being in the customer waiting state is reset to 0, and the value displayed on the display device 41 is also 0. Note that the value immediately before being cleared to 0 may be stored so that it can be referred to later. For example, a history of past consecutive times may be displayed based on the player's operation. In addition, the maximum number of consecutive times, which is the number of consecutive special figure variation display games, that can be stored without being in a waiting state in the gaming machine can be stored, and the value immediately before being cleared to 0 is the maximum number of consecutive times currently stored. If the number is greater than the value, the value immediately before being cleared to 0 may be stored as a new maximum number of consecutive times. Further, when the maximum number of continuous times is updated, that fact may be notified. The maximum number of consecutive times may be a maximum value every business day, or may be a maximum value in a period until the RAM is cleared. Further, both of these may be stored. Further, the number of consecutive times may be cleared to 0 based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C179 that the MODE does not command a customer waiting demonstration (step C179; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the special figure reservation system range (step C184). When it is determined in step C184 that MODE is within the special figure holding system range (step C184; Y), special figure holding information setting processing for executing storage of information relating to the holding of special figure 1 or special figure 2 (Step C185) is performed, and the single-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not in the special figure reservation system range (step C184; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the probability information system range (step C186).

  If it is determined in step C186 that MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C186; Y), a probability information setting process (step C187) for executing a process such as setting an effect corresponding to the current probability state. ) To complete the single command processing. If it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the probability information system (step C186; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the PB system (step C188).

  If it is determined in step C188 that MODE is within the PB range (step C188; Y), the PB information for setting the input state of the operating means based on the PB command and for setting the display based on the PB input mode information command A setting process is performed (step C189), and the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not in the PB range (step C188; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the error / illegal range (step C190).

  If it is determined in step C190 that MODE is in the error / invalid range (step C190; Y), error / illegal setting processing (step C191) for executing processing such as error notification is performed, System command processing ends. If it is determined that MODE is not in the error / unauthorized range (step C191; N), it is determined whether MODE is a command to stop the symbol (step C192).

  If it is determined in step C192 that MODE does not command symbol stop (step C192; N), the single command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is a command to stop the symbol (step C192; Y), it is determined whether the symbol is a normal symbol stop command (step C193). If it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol stop command (step C193; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. The symbol stop command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C193 that the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C193; Y), the corresponding special symbol is set to stop (step C194). If all symbols are stopped, the gaming state flag is set. The normal state is set (step C195), and the single command processing is terminated. The gaming state flag is a flag indicating the current gaming state, and the gaming state flag includes a flag indicating a state such as changing or big hit in addition to the normal state, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation. The

[PB information setting process]
Next, details of the PB information setting process (step C189) in the single-shot command process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the PB information setting process, first, it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C201). . If it is a normal command (step C201; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a PB on / off command (PB on command and PB off command) (step C202).

  If the received command is a PB on / off command (step C202; Y), the state of the sensor designated by the command is set to the designated state (step C203), and the effect buttons (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) are set. The input information is rewritten to the latest state (step C204), and the PB information setting process is terminated. Here, when the PB on command is received, the input state information of the operating means by receiving the PB command is turned on, and when the PB off command is received, the input state information of the operating means by receiving the PB command is turned off.

  The operation means includes an effect button 25 that receives a pressing operation input from a player and a touch panel 29 that receives a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to receive contact operation inputs separately for the eight regions. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not there is an operation input for each of the nine operation inputs. However, when the PB on command is received, the input state information is input for all nine operation inputs. Is considered to be in a certain state (on state). Further, when a PB off command is received, the input state information for all nine operation inputs is regarded as a state in which there is no operation input (off state).

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a PB on / off command (step C202; N), it is determined whether the received command is a PB input command (PB input mode information command) (step C205). If the received command is not a PB input command (step C205; N), the PB information setting process is terminated. If the received command is a PB input system command (step C205; Y), the screen drawing setting of the input mode name corresponding to the command is performed (step C206), and the PB information setting process is terminated. Here, a display is set to indicate whether the auto input mode or the manual input mode is set. This display may be performed on the display device 41 or may be performed on a display LED.

[Direction button input processing]
Next, the details of the effect button input process (step C9) in the main process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the effect button input process, first, the value of the current effect button state area is copied to the previous effect button state area (step C31), and the port state of the effect buttons (effect button 25 and touch panel 29). Data is read (step C32). Next, the input state information of the effect button by receiving the PB command is loaded (step C33), the input data is generated by combining the actual input state and the input state information (step C34), and the combined input data is obtained this time. The effect button state area is saved (step C35). If either the actual input state or the input state information is in a state where there is an operation input (on state), the combined input data is in a state where there is an operation input (on state). That is, the ON state is given priority.

  Then, state change data of the buttons (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is generated based on the value of the previous effect button state area, the value of the current effect button state area, and the like, and is saved in the effect button rising edge area (step C36). . Here, the input from the operation means (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is read within, for example, a timer interrupt process with a cycle of 1 msec, and chattering is removed to determine the state. Then, for example, in the effect button input process with a period of about 33.3 milliseconds, the input content from the operation means is confirmed, the input content is confirmed, and the process of switching the effect according to the result is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the touch sensor 29a is in an effective period (step C37). If the touch sensor 29a is not in an effective period (step C37; N), the process proceeds to step C42. When the touch sensor 29a is in the effective period (step C37; Y), a touch sensor control process (step C38) for determining whether or not there is an input for each touch sensor 29a is performed, and the input content of the touch sensor 29a. Is determined (step C39).

  Specifically, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image for prompting a contact movement operation with respect to the operation means on the display device 41, and is confirmed unless a plurality of inputs such as a flick operation and a round tracing operation are monitored. When an operation that cannot be performed is requested, it is determined that the input content has been confirmed when it can be confirmed that the requested operation has been performed based on a plurality of input results. Here, the plurality of input results are, for example, state change data of the operating means generated at each step C35 of the plurality of effect button input processes executed within a predetermined input content confirmation period. It is. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button input process is performed at a cycle of about 33.3 msec. Therefore, for example, when the input content determination period is set to 333 msec, the effect button input process is performed 10 times within the input content determination period. Is executed to generate 10 state change data. Further, for example, when the presentation control device 300 requests an operation that can be confirmed only by monitoring a single input such as a touch operation by displaying an image or the like that prompts a contact operation on the operation means on the display device 41. When it is determined that the requested operation has been performed based on the current input result, it is determined that the input content has been determined.

  If it is determined in step C39 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a is not finalized (step C39; N), the process proceeds to step C42. When it is determined that the input content of the touch sensor 29a is confirmed (step C39; Y), it is determined whether the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded as a result of the touch sensor control process (step C38) (step C40). ). Specifically, the production control device 300 displays, for example, an image or the like that prompts a plurality of contact operations (such as continuous hitting (continuous touch) operation) or a plurality of contact movement operations (such as a rubbing operation) on the operation means. 41, the ratio of the number of times that the input content has been determined in step C39 after the start of the display to the number of effect button input processes executed after the start of the display is determined in advance. It is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded when the predetermined ratio is reached, or when the number of times that the input content is determined in step C39 after the start of the display reaches a predetermined number of times. . In addition, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image that prompts a single contact operation (one-touch operation or the like) on the operation unit on the display device 41, or a single contact movement operation (flick operation or the like) on the operation unit. ) Is displayed on the display device 41, it is determined in step C39 that the input content has been determined.

  When it is considered that there is an operation input based on the PB on command (on state), all nine operation inputs on the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 are regarded as being in the state of operation input. When a contact movement operation such as an operation has been requested, it is assumed that the requested operation has been performed because a state in which there is an operation input for all nine operation inputs has continued for a predetermined time.

  If it is determined in step C40 that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has not been exceeded (step C40; N), the process proceeds to step C42. If it is determined that the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded (step C40; Y), the input result information of the touch sensor 29a is stored (step C41), and the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a) is in the effective period. Is determined (step C42).

  And when it determines with it not being in the effective period of a PUSH sensor (step C42; N), an effect button input process is complete | finished. If it is determined that the PUSH sensor is in an effective period (step C42; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a), that is, whether a pressing operation on the operating means has been detected ( Step C43). If it is determined in step C43 that there is no input to the PUSH sensor (step C43; N), the effect button input process is terminated. If it is determined that there is an input to the PUSH sensor (step C43; Y), that is, if a pressing operation on the operating means is detected, it is determined whether the effective probability of the PUSH sensor (the effect button switch 25a) has been exceeded. (Step C44).

  Specifically, for example, when the display device 41 displays an image or the like that prompts a plurality of pressing operations (such as continuous hitting (continuous PUSH) operation) on the operation unit, the presentation control device 300 starts the display. The ratio of the number of times that it is determined that there is an input in step C43 after the start of the display to the number of effect button input processes executed in the above reaches a predetermined ratio or after the start of the display. When the number of times it is determined that there is an input in step C43 reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded. In addition, for example, when the display control device 300 displays an image or the like that prompts a single pressing operation (one PUSH operation or the like) on the operation unit on the display device 41, the effect control device 300 determines that there is an input in step C43. It is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded unconditionally.

  If it is determined in step C44 that the effective probability of the push sensor has not been exceeded (step C44; N), the effect button input process is terminated. If it is determined that the effective probability of the push sensor has been exceeded (step C44; Y), the input result information of the push sensor (production button switch 25a) is stored (step C45), and the production button input process is terminated. Through the above-described effect button input processing, the input result information of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is saved, and when the input result information matches the operation requested in the effect being executed, the effect contents are changed based on this. Is performed.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows the actual input state by the operation of the operating means (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) when the input state information by the reception of the PB command is always in the off state, and the recognition state in the effect control device 300. The relationship of (input data after synthesis) is shown. The case where the input state information by the reception of the PB command is always in the off state is a state in the manual input mode or a customer waiting state. The operation means includes an effect button 25 that receives a pressing operation input from a player and a touch panel 29 that receives a contact operation input from the player. In addition, the touch panel 29 is configured to receive contact operation inputs separately for the eight regions. The effect control device 300 recognizes whether or not there are operation inputs for the nine operation inputs. In FIG. 105A, one of the nine operation inputs will be described, but the same processing is performed for the other eight operation inputs.

  When there is no operation input by the operation means (off state), the effect control device 300 also recognizes that it is off. Then, when the operation input is started and there is an operation input (on state), the recognition state in the effect control device 300 is changed to on (t121). In the state where the ON state of the operation means continues, the state recognized as ON by the effect control device 300 continues (t121 to t122). Thereafter, when the operation input is completed and the operation input is not performed (off state), the recognition state in the effect control device 300 is changed to off (t122). In the state where the off state of the operation means continues, the state recognized as off by the effect control device 300 continues (t122 to t123). Thus, the recognition status in the production control device 300 is linked to the presence / absence (actual input state) of the operation input by the operation means. It can also be said that if any of the input state information and the actual input state by the reception of the PB command is on, it is recognized as on.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows the recognition state (after synthesis) when the actual input state by the operation input by the operation means overlaps with the case where the input state information by the reception of the PB command is turned on. Input data) relationship was shown. The case where the input state information by the reception of the PB command is turned on is a state in the auto input mode.

  In a state where there is no operation input by the operation means (off state), when the PB on command is received, the recognition state in the effect control device 300 is changed to on (t131). Then, until the next time the PB off command is received, the effect control device 300 continues to recognize the on state (t131 to t132). Thereafter, when the PB off command is received, the recognition status in the effect control device 300 is changed to off (t132). In a state where there is no operation input by the operation means (off state), the state that the effect control device 300 recognizes as off continues after receiving the PB off command until the next PB on command is received. It is supposed to be.

  Here, the PB off command is received in a state where there is no operation input by the operation means (off state) (t132), and the operation input is started by the operation means before the reception of the next PB on command (t134). There is an input (ON state) (t133). Along with the start of operation input by the operation means, the recognition status in the effect control device 300 is changed to ON. In the state where the ON state of the operation means is continued, even if the PB OFF command is received (t135), the state that the effect control device 300 recognizes as ON continues (t133 to t137).

  When the operation input is completed and no operation input is made (off state) (t137), the recognition status in the effect control device 300 becomes the recognition status according to the PB command. Here, since the PB command received immediately before is the PB on command (t136), until the next PB off command is received (t138), the effect control device 300 continues to be recognized as on.

  As described above, it is possible to generate the state (the state with the operation input) recognized by the effect control device 300 based on both the actual input information by the operation input by the operation means and the input state information by the input of the PB command. Has been. Thereby, in the auto input mode, the progress of the production equivalent to the operation performed by the player without operating the operation means is performed, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to show a change in performance even for a player who feels that the operation of the operation means is troublesome, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, even if a malfunction occurs in the operation means, the change in performance can be shown, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Even if it is a period in which there is no operation input (off state) based on the input state information by the input of the PB command, if the actual input information by the operation input by the operation means is in the on state, this is prioritized and the effect control device At 300, the state is recognized as ON (operation input state). As a result, the player's intention is reflected even in the auto input mode. In addition, since the auto input mode and the manual input mode can be switched, it is possible to set according to the player's preference.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control apparatus 100), an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the effect under the control of the game control means, and a player that can be operated, and effect control of an operation signal based on the operation Operating means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) for outputting to the means, the game control means can transmit a pseudo operation command to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on the operation of the operation means. It is possible to recognize that the operation means has been operated based on the input operation signal and change the effect, and to perform the operation by assuming that the operation means has been operated based on the pseudo operation command. And thus it is possible to vary the. Therefore, it is also possible to change the production by a pseudo operation command different from the operation of the operation means, and it is possible to perform a novel production that is not conventional in the production that requires the operation of the operation means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  In addition, even when the effect control means regards the operation means as not being operated based on the pseudo operation command, if the operation signal is input, the effect control means generates an effect according to the input of the operation signal. It can be changed. Therefore, the intention of the player who has operated the operation means is given priority.

  In addition, a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and detection means (PB input mode switching gate switch 96a) that detects the passage of the game ball in the game area 32 and outputs a detection signal based on the passage to the game control means. The game control means is capable of generating a state in which it can be assumed that the operation means is operated by the pseudo operation command to the effect control means for each input of the detection signal, and the operation means is operated by the pseudo operation command. It will be switched to a state that does not generate a state that is considered to have been. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to generate a state in which the operation means is considered to be operated by the pseudo operation command.

  Further, the pseudo operation command includes a start command for instructing to consider the start of the operation of the operation means, and an end command for instructing to regard the operation of the operation means as being finished. The period from the reception of the end command to the reception of the end command is regarded as a state in which the operation means is operated, and the period from the reception of the end command to the reception of the start command is regarded as a state in which the operation means is not operated. Therefore, the period in which the operating means is operated and the period in which the operating means are not operated are alternately and intermittently continued, so that the same state as when the operating means is operated multiple times. Can be generated, and it is also possible to deal with effects that require a plurality of operation means operations.

  In the effect control device 300, if there is a function that is regarded as a continuous hitting operation when the state where the operating means is operated is continued, the PB on command is accompanied with the start of the special figure variation display game in the auto input mode. May be transmitted, and only the PB off command may be transmitted at the end of the special figure variation display game.

  Further, although the state (recognized with operation input) is generated by the production control device 300 by the PB command, the state recognized by the production control device 300 (state with operation input) is not generated. In any case, when the operation is requested in the production in the auto input mode, it may be considered that the requested operation is performed. For example, the game control device 100 transmits a PB on command when the auto input mode is started, and transmits a PB off command when the auto input mode is released. In the effect control device 300, the PB on command In the period from the reception of the PB off command to the reception of the PB off command, when the operation of the operation means is requested in the production, the requested operation may be regarded as being executed.

  In addition, the game control device 100 switches between the auto input mode and the manual input mode, and the pseudo operation command is transmitted in the auto input mode. You may make it perform the process of input mode. In this case, input information at the PB gate changeover switch is input to the effect control device 300 so that the effect control device 300 switches between the auto input mode and the manual input mode. Further, in the auto input mode, the same processing as when a pseudo operation command is received is performed, and it is assumed that an operation has been performed. Note that the automatic input mode and the manual input mode may be switched by operating the operation means.

  Further, in the effect requiring operation of the operation means, there may be provided a case where the effect does not change when there is no operation of the operation means even in the auto input mode, or even in the manual input mode. Even when there is no operation, there may be provided a case where the production changes as in the case where the operation means is operated.

  Further, as described above, it can be considered that the operation means (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) is operated by the pseudo operation command (PB command) from the game control device 100, so that the development and manufacturing stage of the gaming machine, Even if the game board 30 is not attached to the front frame 12 provided with operation means for maintenance, etc., it is possible to confirm the change in production based on the operation of the operation means using only the game board 30. Efficiency can be increased.

  When developing, manufacturing, or maintaining, the PB gate changeover switch may be operated to set the auto input mode. In addition, when using the game control device 100 equipped with test mode dedicated software for inspecting the gaming machine in the development, manufacture, and maintenance of the gaming machine, the automatic input mode and the manual are input by input from the PB gate changeover switch. Instead of or in addition to switching to the input mode, the test mode may be set based on performing a specific operation, and the auto input mode may be set in the test mode. Further, the auto input mode may be set only when the test mode is set. Further, the PB gate changeover switch may be used for other purposes related to inspection. In addition, if the game control apparatus 100 in which the test mode dedicated software for inspecting the gaming machine is installed and the automatic input mode is set in the test mode, the pseudo operation can be performed even in the gaming machine without the PB gate changeover switch. Inspection by command can be executed.

  In addition, for the effect control device 300, software dedicated to the test mode is installed so that the test mode is set when a command for instructing the start of the test mode is received from the game control device 100. In the test mode, auto input is performed. You may make it become a mode. In addition, the test mode may be entered when a specific operation is performed or when a command instructing the start of the test mode is received from a device other than the game control device 100. Alternatively, the PB command may be valid only in the test mode, and the presentation may be changed assuming that the operating means is operated based on the PB command.

  The test mode is a mode for inspecting each function of the gaming machine in development, manufacture, maintenance, etc. of the gaming machine. For example, when the test mode is set in the game control device 100, information indicating that is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the test mode is also set in the effect control device 300. In addition to this test, a function test of the effect control device 300 can be executed. In this test mode, a test is also performed as to whether processing based on the operation of the operating means is performed appropriately. Since the operation means is provided in the main body frame 12, conventionally, it is not possible to test whether processing based on the operation of the operation means is properly performed unless the game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12. However, since the pseudo operation command is transmitted as described above, it becomes possible to perform the test even with the game board 30 alone, and the inspection efficiency can be improved. It should be noted that the test mode function for inspection is only to output a pseudo operation command, and the other functions may perform the same operation as when a game is performed.

  In other words, in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the effect control means for controlling the effect (Production control device 300) and an operation means (production button 25, touch panel 29) that can be operated by the player and outputs an operation signal based on the operation to the production control means. It is possible to change the effect by recognizing that the operation means is operated based on the operation signal input based on the operation, and to produce the effect on the assumption that the operation means is operated based on the pseudo operation command received from the outside. It is good also as being possible to change. In this way, it is possible to change the production by a pseudo operation command different from the operation of the operation means, and the efficiency of the inspection relating to the operation of the operation means can be improved.

  Further, the production control means (production control device 300) is configured to start the test mode based on the input of information instructing the start of the test mode dedicated to the inspection, and receives the pseudo operation command only in the test mode. Based on this, it may be possible to change the effect on the assumption that the operating means has been operated. In this way, the pseudo operation command can be validated when performing inspection.

  Next, a cable connection structure on the back side of the gaming machine will be described. 106 and 107 show the back side of the gaming machine 10. Various control devices and devices are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, and these control devices and devices are connected by a cable so that control information can be transmitted and received. The connection of the cable is performed by connecting a cable-side connector provided at the end of the cable and a board-side connector provided on the board of the control device or device. However, the gaming machine has a plurality of connectors, and the work of correctly connecting the cables to the plurality of connectors in the manufacture and maintenance of the gaming machine is complicated. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the connection position and the connection direction can be easily understood by attaching the discrimination information to the board side connector and the cable. The discriminating information may be anything that can be discriminated from the code located at the other end, such as adding a color, a pattern, or a character, or providing a difference in unevenness or diameter.

  Here, the board-side connector provided on the back side of the first control device 600 and the second control device 650 constituting the control board arranged on the back side of the game board 30 will be described. Of course, the configuration described here is also applicable to other control devices and devices provided in the game board 30 and the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to peripheral devices of the gaming machine 10 such as a ball rental machine.

  A plurality of board-side connectors 601 to 609 are provided on the back surface of the first control device 600 disposed substantially at the center on the back surface of the gaming machine. FIG. 108 shows a state where cables are connected to the board-side connectors 601 to 609 in the first control apparatus 600.

  The board-side connector 601 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in the left-right direction and arranged in two rows vertically. The cable 611 connected here includes a cable-side connector 611a that can be connected to the board-side connector 601, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 611a into the board-side connector 601. The board-side connector 602 is also a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in the left-right direction and arranged in two rows vertically, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 612a of the cable 612 into the board-side connector 602. It has become.

  The board-side connectors 601 and 602 are connectors having the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 601 and 602, respectively. Here, thick and thin oblique lines are shown, but for example, colors. In the figure, other connectors and cables are also shown as patterns such as hatched lines and hatching as discrimination information, but different patterns have different colors. Of course, the discrimination information may be composed of patterns as shown in the figure.

  The cords 611b and 612b located at one end in the cable alignment direction of the cables 611 and 612 connected to the board-side connectors 601 and 602 are identical to the discrimination information attached to the board-side connector to be connected. The discrimination information is attached. This makes it easy to determine the connection destination. The board-side connectors 601 and 602 are arranged so that the codes 611b and 612b to which the identification information is attached are positioned in the same direction (here, the right side), thereby connecting the cable-side connectors 611 and 612. Can be easily identified.

  The board-side connector 603 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the left-right direction. The cable 613 connected here includes a cable-side connector 613 a that can be connected to the board-side connector 603, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 613 a into the board-side connector 603. The board-side connector 604 is also a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 614a of the cable 614 into the board-side connector 604.

  The board-side connectors 603 and 604 are connectors having the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 603 and 604, respectively. The cords 613b and 614b located at one end in the cable alignment direction of the cables 613 and 614 connected to the board-side connectors 603 and 604 are identical to the discrimination information attached to the board-side connector to be connected. The discrimination information is attached. This makes it easy to determine the connection destination. The board-side connectors 603 and 604 are arranged so that the codes 613b and 614b to which the identification information is attached are positioned in the same direction (here, the left side), thereby connecting the cable-side connectors 613 and 614. Can be easily identified.

  The board-side connector 605 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the left-right direction. The board-side connectors 603 and 604 also have pins arranged in a line, but the board-side connector 605 has a different number of pins. The cable 615 connected here includes a cable-side connector 615a that can be connected to the board-side connector 605, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 615a into the board-side connector 605. The board-side connectors 606, 607, and 608 are also connectors in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the left-right direction. These board-side connectors 606, 607, and 608 are cable-side connectors of cables 616, 617, and 618, respectively. Connection is possible by inserting 616a, 617a, and 618a.

  The board-side connectors 605 to 608 are connectors having the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 605 to 608, respectively. The cords 615b, 616b, 617b, and 618b located at one end in the cable alignment direction of the cables 615 to 618 connected to the respective board side connectors 605 to 608 are attached to the board side connectors to be connected. The same discrimination information as the discrimination information is attached. This makes it easy to determine the connection destination. The board side connectors 605 to 608 are arranged so that the codes 615b, 616b, 617b, and 618b to which the discrimination information is attached are positioned in the same direction (here, the left side). The connection direction of 618 can be easily discriminated.

  The board-side connector 609 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the vertical direction. The board-side connector 609 has the same number of pins and pin arrangement as the board-side connectors 603 and 604. The cable 668 connected to the board-side connector 609 includes a cable-side connector 668a that can be connected to the board-side connector 609, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 668a into the board-side connector 609. The board-side connector 609 is provided with discrimination information different from the board-side connectors 603 and 604 having the same number of pins and pin arrangement. Then, the same discrimination information as the discrimination information attached to the board-side connector 609 is attached to the cord 668b located at one end of the cable 668 connected to the board-side connector 609 in the cord alignment direction.

  Here, the direction in which the cords 611b and 612b to which the pin serving as the contact is attached with the discrimination information in the two rows of the board-side connectors 601 and 602 is located, and the discriminating information in the row of the board-side connectors 603 to 608 The directions in which the cords 613b to 618b marked with are located are different. Thereby, the connection direction of a board | substrate side connector can be grasped | ascertained now by pin arrangement of the board | substrate side connector to connect.

  The discriminating information given to the board-side connectors 601 to 609 is configured so that the same discriminating information is not used between the board-side connectors having the same number of pins and pin arrangement, but the number of pins and pin arrangement are different. Some board-side connectors have the same discrimination information. Of course, the same discrimination information may not be used. Further, even when there are board-side connectors in which three or more rows of pins are arranged, the same number of board-side connectors are arranged so that the codes with the identification information are located on the same side. Further, although the discrimination information is attached to the whole board-side connector and code in the board-side connector and code, it may be attached to a part of the board-side connector and code. The discrimination information only needs to be attached so that the code located at one end in the code alignment direction and the code located at the other end can be discriminated. The determination information may or may not be attached to codes other than. Moreover, as long as one and the other can be discriminated in the code located at the end, discrimination information may be attached to both.

  A plurality of board-side connectors 651 to 659 are provided on the back surface of the second control device 650 disposed on the open end side (left side when viewed from the back surface side) of the front frame 12 on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. FIG. 109 shows a state where cables are connected to the board-side connectors 651 to 659 in the second control device 650.

  The board-side connector 651 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the left-right direction. The cable 661 connected here includes a cable-side connector 661a that can be connected to the board-side connector 651, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 661a into the board-side connector 651. The board-side connectors 652 to 656 are also connectors having the same number of pins and the same pin arrangement, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connectors 662a to 666a of the cables 662 to 666 into the board-side connectors 652 to 656, respectively. Yes.

  The board-side connectors 651 to 656 are connectors having the same shape, but different discrimination information is attached to the board-side connectors 651 to 656, respectively. The cords 661b to 666b located at one end in the cable alignment direction of the cables 661 to 666 connected to the respective board side connectors 651 to 656 are the same as the discrimination information attached to the board side connector to be connected. The discrimination information is attached. This makes it easy to determine the connection destination. The board-side connectors 651 to 656 are arranged so that the codes 661b to 666b to which the identification information is attached are located in the same direction (here, the left side). Can be easily identified.

  Further, the codes 661b to 666b to which the discrimination information is attached are located on the open end side of the front frame 12. As a result, when the front frame 12 is opened and the cables 661 to 666 are connected, the codes 661b to 666b with the identification information attached to the side that is easy to see from the operator are directed to improve work efficiency.

  The board-side connector 657 is a connector in which pins serving as contacts are arranged in a line along the vertical direction. The cable 667 connected here includes a cable-side connector 667a that can be connected to the board-side connector 657, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connector 667a into the board-side connector 657. The board-side connectors 658 and 659 are also connectors having the same number of pins and the same pin arrangement, and can be connected by inserting the cable-side connectors 668a and 669a of the cables 668 and 669 into the board-side connectors 658 and 659, respectively. Yes.

  Different discrimination information is attached to each of the board-side connectors 657 to 659. The codes 667b to 669b located at one end in the cable alignment direction of the cables 667 to 669 connected to the respective board side connectors 657 to 659 are the same as the discrimination information given to the board side connectors to be connected. The discrimination information is attached. This makes it easy to determine the connection destination. The board-side connectors 657 to 659 are arranged so that the codes 667b to 669b to which the identification information is attached are positioned in the same direction (here, the lower side), thereby connecting the cable-side connectors 667 to 669. The direction can be easily distinguished.

  The board-side connector 658 is connected to the board-side connector 609 provided in the adjacent first control device 600 via a cable 668. The first control device 600 and the second control device are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the board-side connector 609 provided in the first control device 600 and the board-side connector 658 provided in the second control device 650. The pins are aligned in the same direction (in this case, the vertical direction). In the board-side connector 609, the code 668b to which the discrimination information is attached is arranged on the upper side, and the same code 668b is arranged in the board-side connector 658 so as to be located on the lower side. As a result, the cable 668 connecting the board-side connector 609 and the board-side connector 658 is twisted, so that the cable does not come apart on the back surface of the gaming machine 10 and noise is offset.

  By attaching the discrimination information as described above, the connection destination and connection direction of the cable can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of cable connection work can be improved. Also, if the board-side connector and the cable-side connector have the same color so that the connection destination of the cable can be determined, the board-side connector and cable that are no longer used when there is a design change of the gaming machine Many side connector combinations will be left. However, by attaching the discrimination information only to the board side connector as described above, the cable side connector can be reused even if there is a change in the design of the gaming machine.

  As described above, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the gaming machine 10 is controlled in a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result. Control board (first control device 600, second control device 650), and the control board is a connector for detachably connecting cables 611 to 618 and 661 to 669. 609, 651 to 659, and the cable includes a plurality of cords arranged in parallel, and among the plurality of cords, cords 611b to 618b and 661b to 669b located at one end in the cord alignment direction. Discrimination information is provided at least in part so that it can be discriminated from the code located at the other end. Side connector, with the alignment direction of the connected code is arranged to be the same, code discrimination information is attached is that they are arranged so as to be located on the same side in the alignment direction. Here, the discriminating information may be anything that can be discriminated from the code located at the other end, such as adding a color, a pattern, or a character, or providing a difference in unevenness or diameter. The cable connection direction can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of cable connection work is improved.

  In addition, a support frame (outer frame 11) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and a main body frame 12 pivotally attached to the support frame so that one end in the left-right direction is pivotable, 2 is provided on the open end side which is the other end in the left-right direction on the back surface of the main body frame 12, and the board-side connectors 651-659 of the control board are arranged in the left-right direction. And the codes 661b to 669b to which the discrimination information is attached are arranged so as to be located on the side close to the open end in the alignment direction. Therefore, the cable connection direction can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of cable connection work is improved.

  Further, at least a part of the board-side connector has the same discrimination information as the discrimination information attached to the cable connected to the board-side connector. Therefore, the connection destination of the cable can be easily known from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection work is improved.

  In addition, the plurality of board-side connectors arranged in the predetermined range have different discrimination information attached to at least adjacent board-side connectors. Therefore, the connection destination of the cable can be easily known from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of the cable connection work is improved.

  Further, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, control for controlling the gaming machine 10 A board (first control device 600, second control device 650) is provided, and the control board is a board side connector 601-609, 651 which is a connector for detachably connecting cables 611-618, 661-669. A plurality of cords arranged in parallel in one row or in a plurality of rows, and among the plurality of cords, cords 611b to 618b, 661b located at one end in the cord alignment direction Discriminating information that can be discriminated from the code located at the other end is attached to at least a part of ˜669b, and the board side connector includes a plurality of connectors arranged in a predetermined range. Are arranged so that the alignment direction of the cords to be connected is the same, and the identification information in the alignment direction is attached for each number of columns in which a plurality of cords in the cable are aligned. Will be arranged so that the sides on which they are located are the same. Therefore, the cable connection direction can be easily understood from the discrimination information, and the efficiency of cable connection work is improved.

  The discrimination information may be attached to all board-side connectors and cables, or may be attached to some board-side connectors and cables. For example, the discrimination information may be attached only to what is attached and detached during work at a game store such as replacement of a game board. In addition, when attaching the discrimination information to the board-side connector, the discrimination information may be attached when manufacturing the board-side connector, or a mounting portion for attaching the discrimination information to a part of the board-side connector is provided. In addition, a part that makes the determination information later may be attached to the attachment part.

  In the above-described embodiment, the discrimination information is attached to both the board-side connector and the cable. However, the discrimination information is attached only to the cable, and the code with the discrimination information is arranged as shown in FIGS. It is good also as only being comprised so that it may become. In this case, the discrimination information of each code may be the same. Even in such a configuration, the connection direction of the cable can be determined, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, discrimination information corresponding to the board-side connector of the connection destination may be attached to the cable-side connector. In this case, it is not necessary to unify the direction of the code with the identification information.

  In addition, the same discrimination information is attached to the board-side connector and the cable connected to the board-side connector. . Moreover, the code | symbol which attaches | subjects discrimination | determination information may be unified with the code connected to a specific pin (for example, 1 pin), and does not need to be. Also, the code adjacent to the code with the discrimination information may be twisted. Thereby, the code with the discrimination information becomes easy to understand and becomes strong against noise.

  Next, auxiliary effects performed in response to a game effect that is an effect corresponding to the progress of the game will be described. This auxiliary effect is performed by changing the light emission mode of the protrusion 80 and the effect button 25. Further, when a plurality of game effects that are the targets of the auxiliary effects are executed, the auxiliary effects corresponding to the game effects having a predetermined high priority are executed. The game effects that are the targets of the auxiliary effects include error notification, effect button operation effect, stage effect, decorative special figure start memory display pre-read effect, and firing direction instruction notification in descending order of priority.

  Error notification is an effect of notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine. The effect button operation effect is an effect of notifying that the operation button 25 can be operated. The stage effect is an effect in which an effect divided into a plurality of stages can proceed sequentially for each stage. At this stage, there is a continuous notice for the target start memory before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory for a plurality of special figure change display games, or during the special figure change display game. In a so-called pseudo-continuous variation effect, a special-figure variation display game that is being executed, in which a re-variation display is started once or more after a temporary stop in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decoration special-figure display game This includes a step-up notice for performing the notice of the special figure variation display game step by step.

  In addition, the special feature drawing start memory display pre-reading effect notifies the information about the start memory by changing the display mode of the special drawing start memory display corresponding to the start memory to be notified in the decorative special drawing start memory display unit 42. It is a production to do. Further, the firing direction instruction notification is an effect of notifying whether the game should proceed in the right-handed or left-handed firing direction.

  FIG. 110 shows an example of an execution mode of auxiliary effects corresponding to each game effect. In FIG. 110, only the projecting portion 80, the effect button 25, and the decorative special figure start memory display portion 42 are schematically shown. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the error notification, all the light emitting areas 81 of the projecting portion 80 are lit in red (indicated by shading in the drawing). In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the effect button operation effect, the effect button 25 is turned on in yellow (indicated by a slanting line on the lower left in the figure) indicating that it can be operated. Thus, all the light emitting areas 81 of the protrusion 80 are lit in yellow. In this case, the effect button 25 constitutes a game effect device capable of executing a game effect that is an effect corresponding to the progress of the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the auxiliary effect corresponding to the step effect changes according to the step. In the first step, the light emitting area 81 and the effect button 25 below the protrusion 80 are blue. (Indicated by the slanted line in the figure) blinking, in the second stage, the lower and middle light emitting areas 81 and the effect buttons 25 of the projecting part 80 blink in yellow, and in the third stage, all light emission of the projecting part 80 The area 81 and the effect button 25 blink in red. In this case, the effect button 25 is also selected as the auxiliary effect device.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display prefetching effect, the target start memory in the prefetch effect in the decoration special figure start memory display in the decoration special figure start memory display unit 42 is displayed. The projecting portion 80 is caused to emit light in response to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the light emission in one of blue, yellow and red. It should be noted that the decorative special figure start memory display in which the pre-reading effect is not executed is lit in a light emission color other than the light emission color at the time of executing the pre-reading effect (for example, white, indicated by a lattice pattern in the figure) to indicate the presence of the start memory. FIG. 110 shows an example in which a pre-reading effect is performed for the start memory having the third digestion order.

  When the first-level blue display with the lowest expectation is performed as a pre-reading effect in the decorative special figure start memory display, the light emitting area 81 below the protrusion 80 is lit in blue. Further, when the second stage yellow display, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first stage, is performed as the pre-reading effect in the decorative special figure start memory display, the lower and middle light emitting areas 81 of the protrusion 80 are yellow. Light. When the third level red display with the highest expectation is performed as the pre-reading effect in the decorative special figure start memory display, all the light emitting areas 81 of the projecting portion 80 are lit in red. When a pre-reading effect is performed with a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays, an auxiliary effect corresponding to a highly expected effect is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), in the auxiliary effect corresponding to the firing direction instruction notification, when instructing left-handed, the lower light emitting area 81, the middle light emitting area 81, and the upper light emitting area. The area to be lit in the order of 81 is sequentially changed to perform display in which light flows from the bottom to the top. Further, when instructing right-handed, the light emitting area 81 at the upper part of the projecting portion 80, the light emitting area 81 at the middle part, and the light emitting area 81 at the lower part are sequentially changed so that light flows from top to bottom. Display.

  The effect control device 300 performs the auxiliary effect control process shown in FIG. 111 in order to control such an auxiliary effect, and controls the light emission mode of the protrusion 80 and the effect button 25 that constitute the auxiliary effect device. In this auxiliary effect control process, first, it is determined whether an error notification is being executed as a game effect (step C311). When the error notification is being executed (step C311; Y), the error notification is set as the auxiliary effect (step C312), and the auxiliary effect control process is ended. Further, when the error notification is not being executed (step C311; N), it is determined whether it is the operation possible timing of the effect button 25 (step C313).

  When it is the timing at which the effect button can be operated (step C313; Y), the effect button operation effect is set as the auxiliary effect (step C314), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. If it is not the timing at which the effect button can be operated (step C313; N), it is determined whether the stage effect is being executed (step C315). If the stage effect is being executed (step C315; Y), an effect corresponding to the stage of the stage effect is set as the auxiliary effect (step C316), and the auxiliary effect control process is terminated. If the stage effect is not being executed (step C315; N), it is determined whether the decorative special figure start memory display prefetching effect is being executed (step C317).

  When the decoration special figure start memory display pre-reading effect is being executed (step C317; Y), an effect corresponding to the stage of the decoration special figure start memory display pre-reading effect is set as an auxiliary effect (step C318), and auxiliary effect control is performed. The process ends. Further, when the decoration special figure start memory display prefetching effect is not being executed (step C317; N), it is determined whether it is during the firing direction change notification period (step C319). The firing direction change notification period is a period from when the firing direction at the time of progressing the game is changed until a predetermined time elapses.

  If it is the firing direction change notification period (step C319; Y), an effect corresponding to the firing direction is set as an auxiliary effect (step C320), and the auxiliary effect control process is terminated. If it is not the firing direction change notification period (step C321; N), an effect corresponding to the effect of the frame decoration device is set (step C321), and the auxiliary effect control process ends. In this case, the auxiliary effect is not performed.

  By the above processing, among the game effects being executed, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect having a higher priority is executed. In addition, when a game effect that is a target of an auxiliary effect is not executed, an effect according to another effect is executed. It should be noted that the priority order of the game effects that are the targets of the auxiliary effects may be determined according to the current game state, such as whether or not it is in a high probability state, whether or not it is in a short time state, and the effect mode. .

  In addition, although a plurality of rectangular light emitting areas 81 are provided in the protrusion 80, a character string such as a model name or a manufacturer name of the gaming machine is arranged in the protrusion 80, and each character included in the character string emits light. The area 81 may be formed. In addition, the light emitting device that emits light on the upper surface of the effect button 25 has a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a circle, and when displaying such that light flows through the protrusion 80 (for example, FIG. 99 (e)), the light emitting device is circular. You may make it perform the display which light-emits the LED arrange | positioned sequentially in the circumferential direction, and light flows. For example, in the case of performing an auxiliary effect corresponding to the firing direction instruction notification with such an effect button 25, the LED is caused to emit light counterclockwise when instructing left-handed, and clockwise when instructing right-handed. Make the LED emit light. Moreover, although the auxiliary | assistant effect device was used as the protrusion part 80 and the effect button 25 which were provided in the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, you may provide an auxiliary effect device in the other location of the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15. For example, when providing an auxiliary effect device having a plurality of light emitting areas radially starting from the effect button 25 and performing an effect button operation effect as an auxiliary effect, an effect that light flows toward the effect button 25 is performed. Anyway. Further, an auxiliary effect device may be provided on the game board 30.

  Based on the above, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, A game effect device (display device 41, decoration special figure start memory display unit 42, etc.) capable of executing a game effect that is a response effect, and an auxiliary effect capable of executing an auxiliary effect that is an effect corresponding to the game effect being executed Device (protruding portion 80, effect button 25) and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling effects in the game effect device and the auxiliary effect device, and the effect control means is a plurality of types of game effect devices. In the case where a game effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect having a higher priority order is controlled to be executed by the auxiliary effect device. Therefore, the player can grasp the effect being executed only by paying attention to the auxiliary effect device, and can execute an effective effect.

  In addition, a plurality of auxiliary effect devices (protruding portion 80, effect button 25) are provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) selects an auxiliary effect device that performs an auxiliary effect according to the game effect. Become. Therefore, the effects produced by the auxiliary effect device can be varied, and an effective effect can be executed.

  In addition, it includes a main body frame (front frame 12 and glass frame 15) that detachably holds a game board 30 equipped with a game effect device (display device 41, decoration special figure start memory display unit 42, etc.), and an auxiliary effect device ( The protrusion 80 and the effect button 25) are provided on the main body frame.

  Therefore, the auxiliary effecting device can be used in common among gaming machines with different game boards attached. In addition, even if it is a different model, the position of the auxiliary effect device that the player should pay attention to is the same, so that the player can perform an effect that is easy to understand and effective.

  In addition, the priority order is determined in advance according to each of the plurality of game states, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the auxiliary effect executed by the auxiliary effect device according to the priority order according to the current game state. Will be selected. Therefore, an appropriate effect according to the gaming state can be executed by the auxiliary effect device, and an effective effect can be executed.

  In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine including the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine including only one special variation winning device. The same applies to the following modifications.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is set immediately before and after the round, and sets the length of the waiting time for opening for waiting for the opening of the special variable winning device to be released in the round according to the type of the round. It has become.

  In the opening waiting time, the jackpot fanfare time for waiting for the start of the first round in the special gaming state, the fanfare time for waiting for the start of the second and subsequent rounds, and the winning ball remaining ball processing There is a time, a remaining ball processing time and an ending time to wait for the end of the special game state after the end of the last round in the special game state. Further, as the type of the round, it is classified according to each release mode shown in FIG. 8 or whether or not it is a specific round that is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area. It is done.

  In order to set the release waiting time according to the type of round, in step A718 in the special figure display processing shown in FIG. . Also, in step A911 in the process for opening the big prize opening shown in FIG. 62, the remaining ball processing time can be selected according to the type of the final round. Further, in step A954 in the winning prize remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 64, the ending time can be selected according to the type of the final round.

  Further, in Step A917 and Step A915 in the processing for opening the big winning opening shown in FIG. 62, the remaining winning ball processing time (upper winning opening remaining ball processing time or lower winning prize depending on the type of round to be finished). Mouth remaining sphere processing time) can be selected. In the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 59, the processing after step A843 is not performed until the big winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special variable winning device to be released next elapses. In FIGS. 60 and 62, the process of clearing the winning prize remaining ball processing timer area to 0 (steps A879 and A889) is not performed.

  By performing such processing, for example, the opening standby time for the first special variable winning device 38 immediately before and / or immediately after the specific round is set to a time longer than the other opening waiting times. Is possible. When the specific round is the first round, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the big hit fanfare time is set as the big hit fanfare time in consideration of the open waiting time immediately before the specific round. In this case, it is possible to set a time longer than the big hit fanfare time when the specific round is not the first round.

  If the specific round is other than the first round, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the interval time set after the round performed immediately before the specific round is set to be longer than the other interval times. Is possible. In addition to or instead of setting the interval time in this way, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), it is the last round before the specific round and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. The lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time (first opening waiting time) set after the round may be made longer than the other lower major winning opening remaining ball processing times. That is, a sufficient time is provided so that game balls that may flow into the probability variation operating area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38 are completely discharged before the specific round.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the interval time (second open waiting time) set after the specific round can be set longer than the interval time set other than after the specific round. is there. Also, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time (second opening waiting time) set after the specific round is set to a lower major winning opening remaining ball set other than after the specific round. The time can be longer than the processing time. Furthermore, when the specific round is the final round as shown in FIG. 113 (c), one or both of the remaining ball processing time and the ending time can be set longer than when the specific round is not the final round. It is. That is, a sufficient time is provided so that the game balls that may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38 after the specific round are completely discharged.

  In addition, although the example which sets the length of opening waiting time about whether it is a specific round as a round type was demonstrated, it may be made to set the length of opening waiting time based on the difference of other types. good. For example, the length of the waiting time for opening may be set based on whether the round is an upper long opening, an upper short opening, a lower V opening, a lower long opening or a lower short opening. Further, the length of the open standby time may be set based on the number of rounds. Further, the length of the waiting time for release may be set based on whether or not a game ball has flowed into the probability change operation area 38h in a specific round.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) and a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, which can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can win a prize, A second special variable winning device 39), and the game control means waits for the opening of the special variable winning device released in the round after the end of each round in a special gaming state constituted by a plurality of rounds. Open waiting time (interval time or extra winning ball remaining ball processing time) to be set, and depending on the type of round immediately before or after the opening waiting time And thus it is possible to set the length of the. Therefore, it is possible to change the waiting time for opening, to make a variety of games in the special game state, and to improve the interest.

  Further, the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) is provided with a specific region (probability changing operation region 38h) into which a game ball can flow, and game control means (game control). The device 100) ends the special gaming state with a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the gaming ball has not flowed into the specific area based on the gaming ball that has won the special variable prize winning device flowing into the specific area. It can occur later, and the special game state is composed of a plurality of rounds, and is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the specific round of the plurality of rounds flows into the specific area. The first opening waiting time which is the opening waiting time for the round in which the special variable winning device opened in the specific round is opened immediately before the specific round and / or the specific round Of the second open waiting time it is an open waiting time, and thus it is possible to set longer than the opening standby time other than the first opening standby time and the second open waiting time.

  Therefore, a change can be brought before or after the specific round, and the games in the special game state can be varied, and the interest can be improved. In addition, by setting the waiting time for opening before a specific round to be long, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device in the round before the specific round from flowing into the specific area, and the fairness of the game Can be secured. In addition, by setting the waiting time for opening after a specific round to be a long time, it is possible to secure time until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the specific round flows into the specific area, The fairness of the game can be secured.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, the display device 41 may be a liquid crystal display device. In this case, the effect performed by the rotatable drum-type board effect device 44 may be performed as an image of the display device 41. Of course, a rotatable drum-type board production device 44 may be provided. Control of the display device 41 composed of the liquid crystal display device is performed by the effect control device 300. Instead of the display device control circuit 312, a VDP (Video Display Processor) as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display, An image ROM storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM Enable production images to be displayed.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a specific round, which is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area, is the final round.

  FIG. 115 shows operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state of the gaming machine of the present modification. In the gaming machine of this modification, the final round is a specific round, and the game ball can flow into the probability changing operation area 38h that forms the specific area in the lower long release or the lower short release in the final round.

  In FIG. 116, the execution mode of the special gaming state for 5R probability variable jackpot is shown in the upper row, and the execution mode of the special gaming state for 6R normal jackpot is shown in the lower row. Moreover, the execution mode of the production common to both special game states is shown in the middle row. The behavior of the 10th round and the 11th round in the 11R probability variation big hit is the same as the behavior shown in the upper part.

  In the case of 5R probability big hit, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the fourth round to the effect control device 300 at the start of the fourth round that is one round before the final round (t201). The fourth round is an upper long release, and the game control device 100 transmits a long release command to the effect control device 300 at the start of the round (t201). The effect control device 300 performs the effect of long opening with the reception of the long opening command (t201 to t202).

  Thereafter, when the fourth round is completed, the game control device 100 transmits an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t202), and the interval time is reached (t202 to t203). The effect control device 300 performs an interval effect in response to the reception of the interval command (t202 to t203).

  When the interval time ends, the fifth round is started. This round is a lower long release, and at the start of the round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command and a long release command corresponding to the fifth round to the effect control device 300 (t203). This round is a specific round, and the lever solenoid is turned on, and the probability variation operation region switch is enabled. The effect control device 300 performs the effect of long opening with the reception of the long opening command (t203 to t204).

  Thereafter, when the fifth round is completed, the remaining sphere processing time is reached, and when the remaining sphere processing time elapses, the ending time is reached. Then, when the ending time elapses, the special game state ends (t207). In addition, when the fifth round ends, the game control device 100 transmits an ending command to the effect control device 300 (t204), and the effect control device 300 performs an ending effect in response to the reception of the ending command (t204 to t207). Since the remaining sphere processing time is 1300 ms and the ending time is 4000 ms, the length of the ending effect is 5300 ms.

  In the case of a 6R normal big hit, the fourth and fifth rounds are the same as the fourth and fifth rounds of the 5R probable big hit. However, since the 5th round of the 6R normal big hit is not a specific round, the lever solenoid remains off and the probability change operation region switch remains invalid. Then, at the end of the fifth round just before the last round, the game control device 100 transmits an ending command instead of an interval command to the effect control device 300 (t204). The effect control device 300 performs an ending effect in response to the reception of the ending command (t204 to t207).

  However, the game control device 100 performs a process for shifting to the next round, and after the end of the fifth round, the interval time is reached (t204 to t205). This round is a specific round, and the lever solenoid is turned on, and the probability variation operation region switch is enabled. However, in this specific round, the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 is short, and the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area is very low.

  In addition, the lower short release in the sixth round of the normal big hit constitutes the third execution mode, and the lower long release in the fifth round in the probability big hit mentioned above is a game to the specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) than the third execution mode. The fourth execution mode is that the inflow of the sphere is easy and the execution period is longer than the third execution mode.

  At the start of the sixth round, the game control device 100 transmits a round command corresponding to the sixth round to the effect control device 300 (t205), but the effect control device 300 does not perform a round effect based on this round command, Continue the ending production that has already started. In addition, when the sixth round is finished, the game control device 100 does not transmit an ending command to the effect control device 300 (t206), sets the remaining ball processing time as the processing for ending the special gaming state, and the remaining ball processing time. Set the ending time when elapses. Then, when the ending time elapses, the special game state ends (t207).

  Here, the interval time after the end of the fifth round is 300 ms, and the duration time of the sixth round (which is the same as the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38) is 200 ms. Since the remaining ball processing time is 1300 ms and the ending time is 3500 ms, the length of the ending effect is 5300 ms. That is, the time for executing the ending effect is the same as in the case of the probability variation jackpot, and the same ending effect as in the case of the probability variation jackpot is executed.

  In this way, by performing the ending effect in a specific round in a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of a specific round that has a very low possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability changing operation area 38h that forms the specific area. It is possible to reduce the feeling of discouragement when it is usually a big hit. In addition, the 5R probability variation big hit and the 6R normal big hit can seem to have the same production, making it difficult for the player to distinguish, and this also reduces the feeling of disappointment when the normal big hit.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
In order to perform the process as described above, a process for opening a special prize opening shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the process for opening a special prize opening shown in FIG. In the process during opening of the special winning opening, if it is not the final round (step A906; N), the special winning opening opening data and the interval time (300 ms in this case) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special game processing timer area ( In step A907), the processing number is set to “3” for fanfare / interval processing (step A910), and it is determined whether it is a round immediately before the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A910) A2201).

  If it is not one round before the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2201; N), an interval command is prepared (step A908), an effect command setting process is performed (step A909), and step A915 Migrate to If it is the round immediately before the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2201; Y), an ending command is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A913). The process proceeds to step A915.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A906; Y), the winning ball opening data and the remaining ball processing time (here, 1300 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A911). The processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A914), and it is determined whether it is the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2202).

  When it is the final round in the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2202; Y), the process proceeds to step A915. That is, in this case, since the ending command has already been transmitted at the end of the previous round, the ending command is not transmitted here. If the final round is not the normal hit (6R normal big hit) (step A2202; N), an ending command is prepared (step A912), an effect command setting process is performed (step A913), and the process proceeds to step A915.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Also, instead of the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG. 59, the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG. 118 is performed. In this fanfare / interval process, in steps A841 and A859, it is determined whether it is the start of the final or odd round. In addition, the determination as to whether it is the final round (step A851) is not performed, and the determination as to whether it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A852) is that the final round is a specific round. It is determined that it is a round (step A852; Y).

[Big hit command processing]
Also, instead of the jackpot command processing shown in FIG. 98, the jackpot command processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed. In this jackpot command processing, it is determined whether or not the ending effect has been started (step C351) instead of determining whether or not the short-circuit opening other than the specific round is open (step C144). If the ending effect has already been started (step C351; Y), the big hit command processing is terminated. That is, when a round command transmitted at the start of the last round of 6R normal jackpot is received, the processing related to the round command is not performed. If the ending effect has not been started (step C351; N), the round command information is saved (step C145), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a specific area (in which a game ball can flow into the inside, which can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state where a game ball can win a game) A special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) having a probability variation operating region 38h), and the game control means is configured to play a game based on the flow of game balls that have won the special variation winning device into the specific region. A gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than if the ball did not flow into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special gaming state, and among the multiple rounds of opening the special variable winning device, It is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variation prize winning device has flowed into the specific area, and there are multiple types of special results, and the execution mode of the final round according to the type of the special results As one of the third execution mode and the fourth execution mode in which the game ball can easily flow into the specific area and has a longer execution period than the third execution mode, When the final round becomes the third execution mode, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game is in a period from the end of the round immediately before the final round to the end of the special game state. When a ending effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a predetermined length is executed and the final round is the fourth execution mode, the ending effect is executed after the end of the final round And thus was Unishi. Therefore, the period during which it is difficult to enter the specific area due to the ending effect can be made inconspicuous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of condition achievement effects.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the condition achievement effect can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. As a predetermined start condition, when it becomes clear that there is a start memory that results in a big hit by the pre-reading process, or when the start lottery of the condition achievement effect is won, a specific change pattern in the special figure change display game If it is selected. However, since the conditions for the regular effects and the condition achievement effects are the same type, if the regular effects are executed during the execution of the condition achievement effects, the conditions may be unintentionally achieved or the conditions may not be achieved. When the execution period of the condition achievement effect overlaps with the regular effect, a process is performed to prevent inconvenience.

  In FIG. 120, the condition achievement effect start condition is established in the 25th game from the end of the special gaming state, and the condition achievement effect is started for 10 games. An example is shown in which a regular production is scheduled and overlaps with the period of the condition achievement production. As a method for preventing inconvenience in such a case, any one of the processes (1) to (3) can be performed.

  The process of (1) ends the condition achievement effect before the start of the regular effect. Note that the timing for ending may be any time until the start of the regular production (or before the production of the conditional production). The process (2) starts the condition achievement effect after the regular effect. Note that the start timing may be after the end of the special figure variation display game for executing the regular effect (or after the condition effect is ended). In these cases, the value of the number of high probability fluctuations for executing the condition achievement effect is set to be in each period.

  The process (3) executes the condition achievement effect over the period (10 games here) set at the start of the condition achievement effect regardless of the presence or absence of the regular effect. (It may be before the start of the process) so that inconvenience does not occur by changing the conditions. FIG. 121 shows an example of an execution mode of the condition achievement effect in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the start condition of the condition achievement effect is established and the condition achievement effect is started in the 25th game from the end of the special game state. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the change display of the special figure change display game which is the 25th game is started from the end of the special game state, and is ended with the shift result as shown in FIG. 121 (c). . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), a special figure variation display game, which is the 26th game from the end of the special game state, is started, and a regular effect is executed as shown in FIG. 121 (e). A start-up memory a corresponding to is generated.

  As the start memory a is generated, the game control device 100 performs a prefetch process to determine whether the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory a is a special result or a variation pattern. The determination result is also transmitted to the effect control device 300. Here, it is found that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory a is out of the pre-reading process, and the variation pattern of the SP1 reach is selected as the regular effect. Here, the start memory digested prior to the start memory a for executing the regular effect does not include a result whose result is a special result.

  Based on this prefetching result, the effect control device 300 changes the condition to be notified to the player to SP2 reach, and notifies the player as shown in FIG. 121 (f). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (h), a special figure variation display game based on the start memory a serving as a regular effect is started, and the SP1 reach is achieved as shown in FIG. 121 (i). Thereafter, the deviation result is derived as shown in FIG. 121 (j). However, as described above, the condition for notifying the player is SP2 reach, so the condition is not achieved, and the deviation result is obtained. There will be no contradiction in the performance achievement.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory for executing the regular production is a special result and the variation pattern of the SP1 reach is selected as the regular production by the prefetching process, the condition is set to SP1 reach. By providing a case where the change is made, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even if there is a change. In addition, for the start memory that is digested during the condition achievement effect period and that does not perform the regular effect, when the pre-read result shows that there is a start memory that results in a special result, the start memory The condition may be changed to the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the memory.

  Based on the above, a predetermined upper limit number is used as a start memory that becomes a right to execute a variable display game by extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). Start storage means (game control device 100) that stores the random number stored as start memory in the start storage means, and prior determination means (game control device) that determines before the start of the variable display game based on the start storage 100), and the regular production control means (game control device 100, production control device 300) is based on a random number among a plurality of productions that can be executed as the regular production in the variable display game that is the execution timing of the regular production. Is selected and executed, and the condition achievement effect control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is configured as If one of the plurality of effects that can be executed is selected and set, and the execution of the periodic effect by the periodic effect control means is included in the predetermined period for executing the condition achievement effect, the periodic effect is selected. The set condition can be changed based on the result determined by the prior determination unit and the type of the regular effect for the variable display game to be executed. Therefore, when a regular effect is executed during execution of a condition achievement effect, the condition can not be achieved or the condition can be achieved in the regular effect, and the condition achievement effect and the regular effect overlap. Inconvenience can be prevented.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of condition achievement effects.

  In the gaming machine of the present modification, the SP reach effect executed in the regular effect is a condition for the subsequent condition achievement effect. FIG. 122 shows an example of a condition achievement effect in the gaming machine of this modification. As shown in FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (e), SP1 reach is executed as a regular effect and ends with the result of losing, and the condition achievement effect starts as shown in FIG. 122 (f) from the next special figure variation display game. Has been. Here, since SP1 reach was executed as a regular effect, SP1 reach is set as a condition achievement effect condition. In the special figure variation display game in which the result is a special result during the execution of the condition achievement effect, the reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 122 (h), and the condition becomes SP1 reach as shown in FIG. 122 (i). And a special result is derived as shown in FIG. 122 (j).

[Variation pattern setting process]
In order to perform such control, the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 123 is performed instead of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern setting process, when the high probability variation number is the value of the regular effect (step A2301; Y), a condition flag corresponding to the lottery result is saved (step A2302). Thereby, the information (in this case, one of SP1 to SP3) of the variation pattern set in the regular effect is stored. In addition, in the production | presentation control apparatus 300, based on the information of the fluctuation | variation pattern performed by regular production | presentation, in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the start of condition achievement production | generation and notification of conditions are performed.

[Special figure information setting process]
Further, in place of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 49, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 124 is performed. In this special figure information setting process, the determination (step A454) whether the high probability variation number is the value of the condition achievement effect is performed before the determination (step A453) whether the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol. If the high probability variation number is the value of the condition achievement effect (step A454; Y), the variation group selection pointer is updated to the value for the condition achievement effect according to the stop symbol pattern number and the condition flag (step A454). A458).

  In addition, in the gaming machine of this modification, a table shown in FIG. 125 is used instead of the table shown in FIG. 125 (a) to 125 (c) are the same as FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c). FIG. 125 (d) is used when the result is a big hit and the condition achievement effect is not being executed, and when the result is a big hit and the condition achievement effect is being executed, FIGS. 125 (e) to (g) are used. . 125 (e) to (g) are selected by a condition flag. When the regular performance is SP1 reach and SP1 reach is set as a condition, FIG. 125 (e) is used and only SP1 reach can be selected. . Similarly, when the regular production is SP2 reach and SP2 reach is set as a condition, FIG. 125 (f) is used, and only SP2 reach can be selected, and the regular production is SP3 reach and SP3 reach is set as a condition. If it is, FIG. 125 (g) is used, and only the SP3 reach can be selected.

  In this way, by using the effect executed in the regular effect as a condition, the condition achievement effect is started after the contents of the condition are shown to the player, and the effect is easy for the player to understand. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation due to a loss of SP reach executed as a regular effect.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the special figure variation display game.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously. However, if the other special figure fluctuation display game is finished with a special result while one special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the one special figure fluctuation display game is regarded as a result other than the special result (outlier result). I try to end it.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of this modification, the special results include a big hit and a small hit, and a special gaming state occurs even when a small hit is reached. In the special gaming state based on the small hit, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device is opened as in the special gaming state. However, the big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the consecutive accessory operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  In FIG. 126, during execution of one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game ends with a special result (big hit or small hit), and the one special figure fluctuation display game has a result other than the special result. An example in which the process is terminated with the result (outlier result) is shown. Note that the timing for ending the one special figure variation display game as a result other than the special result (outlier result) is at the end of the special figure variation display game that is the special result, that is, at the end of the result display time. is there.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows an example in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result of the disengagement when the special figure 1 variable display game ends with a big hit during the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Indicated. First, the special figure 1 variable display game with a big hit is started (t301), and then the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t302). The result of this special figure 2 variable display game is either a big hit, a small hit or a miss. In addition, the variation time is set at the start of each special figure variable display game, and the result display time is set at the end of the variable time, but the end timing (t305) of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is The special figure 1 variable display game is finished earlier than the special figure 2 variable display game later than the end timing (t304) of the variable display game shown in FIG.

  The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t303), and the display time for displaying the result ends, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ends with a big hit (t304). At this time, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is in the fluctuation time is forcibly stopped at the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t304). Then, the special figure 2 variable display game ends. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t304) during the display time for displaying the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is also forcibly ended with the result of losing. Will be. The same applies even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit.

  FIG. 126 (b) shows an example in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed to the result of losing by the special figure 2 variable display game ending with a small hit during the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game. showed that. First, the special figure 1 variable display game with a big hit is started (t311), and then the special figure 2 variable display game with a small hit is started (t312).

  After that, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends (t313), and the display time for displaying the result is reached. The display time is set (t313 to t316). Before the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game ends (t314), the display time also ends (t315), and the special figure 2 variable display game starts first. It ends with a small hit result. With the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed from the jackpot result to the off result (t315), and the special result is displayed with the end of the newly set display time. The 1-variable display game ends (t316).

  That is, before the display time for displaying the result in one special figure fluctuation display game ends and the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the other special figure fluctuation display game becomes a special result (big hit or small hit). When the display time is over and the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the one special figure fluctuation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (outlier result). In addition, before the display time for displaying the result in one special figure fluctuation display game is over and the special figure fluctuation display game is over, the other special figure fluctuation display game is a result of losing and the display time is over. When the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the one special figure fluctuation display game is continued without any influence.

  126 (c) and 126 (d) show a display time table for setting the display time for displaying the result. FIG. 126 (c) shows a display time table 1 used when a big hit has not yet occurred after power-on of a gaming machine with a RAM clear, or when less than 100 games have elapsed since the end of the special gaming state with the big hit. Indicated. FIG. 126 (d) shows the display time table 2 used in the case of 100 games or more from the end of the special gaming state associated with the big hit. Note that, in the gaming machine of this modification, when a probable big hit, the high probability state continues until the next big hit.

  In any case, in the case of the normal symbols A to C where the result is usually a big hit, the result is lost, and a longer display time is set than in the case of the probability variation symbol and the small hit symbol. In the case of a small hit symbol, a very short display time is set. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, there is a higher possibility that the other special figure fluctuation display game will end with a small hit or a probable big hit before the end of the display time. There is a high possibility that the result will be changed to the result. Especially in the case of small hits, the display time is extremely short, and a short variation time is set, so that the possibility of ending the special figure fluctuation display game first is high with the small hit result. .

  As a result, it is possible to avoid that the high probability state does not continue by changing the normal jackpot to the result of being out of order, particularly in the high probability state. Further, the display time of the normal symbols A to C whose result is usually a big hit is longer in the display time table 2 than in the display time table 1. As a result, in the case of a so-called humming state where the next big hit does not occur easily even though it is a high probability state, the possibility of avoiding the normal big hit is increased, and the possibility that the next big hit will be a probable big hit is likely to increase. Has been. In addition, in the display time table 1 shown in FIG. 126 (c), the display time differs depending on the normal symbols A to C, and the possibility of avoiding the normal big hit is different, so the interest increases.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In order to perform the process as described above, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interruption process, when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the start port switch monitoring process is performed (step S111a). This start port switch monitoring process is the process shown in FIG. Then, instead of the special figure game process, a special figure 1 game process (step S111b) for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and a special figure 2 game process (step S111c) for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game are performed. Do. In the game machine of this modification, the normal variation winning device 37 that gives the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game can always be won, and the regular game for controlling the opening and closing of the normal variation winning device 37 No processing is performed. Therefore, the normal variation winning device 37 is a winning opening that does not require fraud monitoring.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 128 shows the special FIG. 1 game process (step S111b) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state that is executed based on whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 2 is in effect (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103. In the big prize port switch monitoring process, the upper big prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 35, the lower big prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 36, the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process shown in FIG. The remaining ball processing timer update processing and the lever solenoid control processing shown in FIG. 68 are performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. This fanfare / inter-interval process (step Y111) is the process shown in FIG. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed. This special winning opening open process (step Y112) is the process shown in FIG.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. This special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) is the process shown in FIG. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do. This special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) is the same as that shown in FIG. 65 for the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. The small hitting fanfare process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 129 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed based on whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 is not big hit / small hit (step Y131; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the big prize port switch monitoring process, the upper big prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 35, the lower big prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 36, the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process shown in FIG. The remaining ball processing timer update processing and the lever solenoid control processing shown in FIG. 68 are performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to is set in the register (step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 Special processing (step Y139) for performing setting of information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y139). When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, A special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. This fanfare / interval process (step Y142) is the process shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed. This special winning opening open process (step Y143) is the process shown in FIG.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. This big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) is the process shown in FIG. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do. This special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y145) is the same as that shown in FIG. 65 for the special figure 2 variable display game.

  In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process The small hitting fanfare process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 130 shows a special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special game state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y210), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y202). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y210. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y202; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y205), and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y206). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y207). Note that the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game at the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y206), and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) (step Y208). Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y209), and the special figure 1 ordinary process is terminated. Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 131 shows the special figure 2 routine process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y234), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222).

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y227), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y228). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y228; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y229; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230), and if not started (step Y230; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Also, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y228; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y234.

  In the processing related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y231), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y232). Command setting processing is performed (step Y233), and the process proceeds to step Y234. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y203 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 132 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y205) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the special figure fluctuation display game for changing the presentation mode is saved. A game frequency command corresponding to the value of the game frequency area for managing the execution frequency is prepared (step A242), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A243).

  Thereafter, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y244) for setting off information, big hit information or small hit information as result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. Next, after the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A245) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed, the special symbol which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. 1 information setting process (step A246) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set. (Step A247). Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A248) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A249) is performed.

  Next, a time shortening variation number update process is performed to manage the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state and the number of special figure variation display games that can be performed in a short time state (step Y250). In the gaming machine of this modification, a sufficiently large value (for example, 10000) is set as the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations and the number of time-shortening fluctuations in the case of a probable big hit so that the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Has been.

  Thereafter, “1” is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step A251), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A252). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A253), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A254). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A255), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set here (step A256), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A257), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 133 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the special figure 2 ordinary process described above. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the special figure fluctuation display game for changing the effect mode is saved. A game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of executions is prepared (step A262), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A263).

  After that, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y264) for setting off information, big hit information or small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A265) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step A266) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step A267). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A268) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A269) is performed.

  Next, a time shortening variation number update process is performed to manage the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state and the number of special figure variation display games that can be performed in a short time state (step Y270). In the gaming machine of this modification, a sufficiently large value (for example, 10000) is set as the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations and the number of time-shortening fluctuations in the case of a probable big hit so that the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Has been.

  Thereafter, “1” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step A271), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A272). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A273), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A274). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A275), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A276), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A277), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area is 0, whereby variation display is started from a state in which all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 134 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number output number is updated by +1 (step Y301), and a command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y302). (Step Y303)

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y304), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y305). In the gaming machine of this modification, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of revolutions is 100 or more after the big hit (step Y306). Whether the number of revolutions after the big hit is 100 revolutions or more can be determined by the value of the number of high-probability fluctuations and the number of time-shortening fluctuations. If it is not more than 100 revolutions after the big hit (step Y306; N), the display time table 1 (see FIG. 126 (c)) is set (step Y307), and the process proceeds to step Y309. If the number of revolutions is 100 or more after the big hit (step Y306; Y), the display time table 2 (see FIG. 126 (d)) is set (step Y308), and the process proceeds to step Y309. Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y309).

  Then, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y310), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y311). Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y312). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y313). ), The special figure 1 changing process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 135 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number output number is updated by +1 (step Y321), and a command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y322). Perform (step Y323).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y324), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y325). In the gaming machine of this modification, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of revolutions after the big hit is 100 or more (step Y326). Whether the number of revolutions after the big hit is 100 revolutions or more can be determined by the value of the number of high-probability fluctuations and the number of time-shortening fluctuations. If it is not more than 100 revolutions after the big hit (step Y326; N), the display time table 1 (see FIG. 126 (c)) is set (step Y327), and the process proceeds to step Y329. If the number of revolutions is 100 or more after the big hit (step Y326; Y), the display time table 2 (see FIG. 126 (d)) is set (step Y328), and the process proceeds to step Y329. Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y329).

  Then, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y330), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y331). Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y332). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y333). ), The special figure 2 changing process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
136 and 137 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y401), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y402).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y403), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y404). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y405). If it is not big hit (step Y405; N), the process proceeds to step Y424. If it is a big hit (step Y405; Y), a special figure 2 forced stop process is performed to forcibly stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game from the result (step Y406). As a result, when the special figure 1 variable display game is ended with a big hit first, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with the result of the disengagement. After that, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, the special symbol per signal ON ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y407).

  Then, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y408), and the round number upper limit value (12, 5, or 4 in the case of this modification) corresponding to the special figure 1 round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the value area (step Y409). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y410).

  Next, the command is saved from the special symbol 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y411), and the special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared. Then (step Y412), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y413). Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the special figure variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A414), and an effect command setting process (step A415) is performed. . Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y416), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y417).

  Next, the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y418). In the case of this modified example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y419), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y420). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y421) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y422). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y423) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit at step Y405 (step Y405; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out of place information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y424). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y424; Y), a special figure 2 forced stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with the result of disengagement is performed (step Y425). As a result, when the special figure 1 variable display game is ended with a small hit first, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with the result of the disengagement.

  Further, the command is saved from the special symbol 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y426), and the special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared. (Step Y427), an effect command setting process is performed (Step Y428). Then, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y429), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y430), a special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process (step Y431) is performed, and a special figure 1 display process is performed. Exit.

  If it is determined in step Y424 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y424; N), a special figure game information check process (step Y432) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed. Next, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step Y434), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A435), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. To do. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play, the special figure 2 variable display game is not forcibly terminated with the result of the deviation.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 show the special figure 2 display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y441), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y442).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y443), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y444). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y445). If it is not big hit (step Y445; N), the process proceeds to step Y464. If it is a big hit (step Y445; Y), special figure 1 forced stop processing is performed to forcibly stop the special figure 1 fluctuation display game from the result (step Y446). As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game is ended with a big hit first, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with the result of the disengagement. After that, a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal ON ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y447).

  Then, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y448), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the special figure 2 round number upper limit information (12, 5, or 4 in the case of this modification) is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. Save in the value area (step Y449). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y450).

  Next, the command is saved from the special symbol 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y451), and the special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared. Then (step Y452), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y453). Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the special figure variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A454), and an effect command setting process (step A455) is performed. . Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y456), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y457).

  Next, the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y458). In the case of this modified example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y459), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y460). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y461) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y462). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y463) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y445, if Special Figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y425; N), that is, if big hit flag 2 is out-of-game information, it is determined whether loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y464). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y464; Y), a special figure 1 forced stop process for forcibly stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with the result of losing is performed (step Y465). As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game is finished with a small hit first, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with the result of the losing.

  Further, the command is saved from the special symbol 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y466), and the special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared. (Step Y467), effect command setting processing is performed (Step Y468). Then, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y469), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y470), a special figure 2 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process (step Y471) is performed, and a special figure 2 display process is performed. Exit.

  If it is determined in step Y464 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y464; N), special figure game information check processing (step Y472) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed. Next, “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (step Y474), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A475), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. To do. In this case, since the special figure 2 variable display game is out of play, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcedly terminated with the result of the deviation.

[Special Figure 2 Forced Stop Processing]
FIG. 140 shows the special figure 2 forced stop process (step Y406) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In the special figure 2 forced stop process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is also being executed (step Y501). Whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y501; N), the special figure 2 forced stop process is terminated. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y501; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step Y502). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of the detachment based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y502; Y), the process proceeds to step Y504. If the special figure 2 display process is not in progress (step Y502; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y503), and the process proceeds to step Y504. Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y504). Here, if the result is out of order, the display time for the shift is saved.

  Then, an off symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 is prepared (step Y505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y506). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y508), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y508), a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y509), and special figure 2 forced Terminate the stop process. It should be noted that in the effect control device 300, when the special figure 2 variable display game has been stopped and the display time has been reached, when the special figure 2 variable display game is received, processing relating to the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. However, if the result is not an outlier, the result is replaced with the outlier.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 141 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y509) in the special figure 2 forced stop process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y511), and the process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y512).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y513), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y514). Then, as the setting of information for obtaining the result of the loss, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y515), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y516).

  Next, the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area is cleared (step Y517), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y518), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y519). ). Then, the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y520), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. With the above processing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing based on the end of the display time when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a special result and the result is displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Forced Stop Processing]
FIG. 142 shows the special figure 1 forced stop process (step Y446) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In the special figure 1 forced stop process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also being executed (step Y521). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y521; N), the special figure 1 forced stop process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y521; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step Y522). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y522; Y), the process proceeds to step Y524. Further, when the special figure 1 display process is not in progress (step Y522; N), the symbol determination number output count is updated by +1 (step Y523), and the process proceeds to step Y524. Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y524). Here, if the result is out of order, the display time for the shift is saved.

  Then, an off symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 is prepared (step Y525), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y526). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y528), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y528), and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y529). Terminate the stop process. It should be noted that in the effect control apparatus 300, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been stopped and the display time has elapsed, when the decoration special figure 1 stop command is received, processing relating to the stop of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is performed. However, if the result is not an outlier, the result is replaced with the outlier.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 143 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y529) in the special figure 1 forced stop process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y531), and the process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y532).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y533), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y534). Then, as setting of the information for obtaining the result of the loss, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y535), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y536).

  Next, the special figure 1 big opening opening information area is cleared (step Y537), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y538), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y539). ). Then, the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol region (step Y540), and the special symbol 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing based on the end of the display time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result and the result is displayed.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game for which execution control is performed Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control means is executed by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game being controlled has a special result, the second variation display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variation display game, the other variation display game can be forcibly stopped by the result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be.

  The upper limit number of special figure 2 hold (second start memory) may be set to zero. The special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning may be started only when a prize is given to the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. In this case, if there is a winning in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the temporary figure 2 temporary display game based on the winning is temporarily started to perform the process. The second start memory is generated, but this second start memory is not for suspending the start of the special figure variation display game unlike the first start memory.

  Further, the upper limit number of the second start memory is set to 0, and only the small hit and big hit can be generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, and the fluctuation time in the case of the small hit may be a short time. The fluctuation time is preferably less than the normal jackpot display time. Even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is a small hit after the normal big hit display time is started, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. It is more preferable to end the display earlier than the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the display time is normally a big hit. In this way, when the normal big hit occurs in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the display time is reached, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 wins the game ball and starts the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The normal jackpot can be forcibly changed to a result of losing.

  In such a case, notification is made so that the game proceeds with a left-hand strike except in the special game state. Further, in order to prevent a right-handed strike for the purpose of generating a small hit in a normal gaming state that is not in a high probability state or a short-time state, a warning is given when a winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is detected in the normal gaming state. May be performed. Further, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state set to an extremely long variable time (for example, 10 minutes), it is not advantageous to the player. Also good.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37 may not be opened in the normal gaming state, and may be opened only in the high probability state or the short time state. In this case, in the high probability state and the short time state, the variation time and display time of the normal map change display game are made extremely short, and when making a right turn, the normal figure change gate is almost surely passed through the normal map start gate 34. The winning device 37 is almost certainly won. In this way, if the player makes a right turn immediately after the special figure 1 variable display game is normally a big hit and the variable time ends, before the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends. In addition, it is possible to generate a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, and forcibly change the normal big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game to a result of losing.

  Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that can give a player a gaming value in the case, the first start winning port (start winning port 36), the first starting winning port, And a second start winning port (in the normal variation winning device 37) arranged at different positions, and the first variation display game is executed as a variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port First variation display game execution means (game control device 100) capable and second variation display game execution means capable of executing the second variation display game as a variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (Game control device 00), and the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are in a state of aiming for winning in the first starting winning opening by adjusting the launch force of the game ball, and to the second starting winning opening It is arranged in the game area 32 so that it can select the state aiming for winning a prize, and the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. A high probability state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a probability state, and the special result includes a first special result (probable change) that can generate a first special game state (special game state based on jackpot). A big hit) and a second special result (usually a big hit), and a second special gaming state (a special gaming state based on a small hit) that can be given to a player lower than the first special gaming state. 3 special results (small hits) and high probability When the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result, the generating means sets the result of the variable display game over a predetermined period as a high probability state after the end of the first special game state based on the first special result. If the probability of the first special result is higher than the normal state and the result of the variable display game is the second special result, the first special game state is changed after the first special game state based on the second special result. When the probability that the result of the display game is the first special result is the normal state and the result of the variable display game is the third special result, after the end of the second special game state based on the third special result, The probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result is set to the same probability as before the third special result is derived, and the first variable display game executing means executes the first variable display game. Doing control In this case, when the second variation display game for which execution control is being performed by the second variation display game execution means ends with a special result, the first variation display game for which the execution control is being performed is a result other than the special result. The second variation display game executing means performs the execution control by the first variation display game executing means when performing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the variable display game is ended with a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result.

  The variable display game includes a variable time and a display time for displaying the result after the variable time. The variable display game is configured to end with the end of the display time. The display time when the three special results are derived is shorter than the display time when the other results are derived. In addition, the total time of the variation time and the display time in the variation display game that is the third special result is shorter than the variation time in the variation display game that is the second special result. In addition, the probability that the result of the second variation display game becomes the third special result is set to be higher than the probability that the result of the first variation display game becomes the third special result.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 38 1st special variable winning device (special variable winning device)
38h Probability change operation area (specific area)
100 Game control device (game control means)
300 Production control device (production control means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
In the special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won, and a special variable winning device including a specific area into which the game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
Based on the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flowing into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area is displayed after the end of the special game state. Can occur,
Among a plurality of rounds that open the special variable winning device, it is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the first round flows into the specific area,
There are a plurality of types of special results, and according to the type of the special results, the first round of execution as the mode of execution of the first round, and the inflow of game balls to the specific area more than the first mode of execution. Selecting one of the second execution modes that is easy and has an execution period longer than the first execution mode;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
In the case of the first execution mode, a fanfare effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of the second round is executed,
In the case of the second execution mode, the game machine is characterized by executing an effect corresponding to the first round after executing the fanfare effect. The game control means includes
In any of the first execution mode and the second execution mode, the special variation winning device is configured to be opened for a predetermined opening time in a period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed,
The opening of the special variable winning device during the period in which the predetermined fanfare effect is executed has the same opening time in both the first execution mode and the second execution mode, and the first execution mode and the 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the time from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening differs between the second execution mode and the second execution mode. In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
In the special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won, and a special variable winning device including a specific area into which the game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
Based on the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flowing into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area is displayed after the end of the special game state. Can occur,
Among the multiple rounds that open the special variable winning device, it is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device in the final round flows into the specific area,
There are a plurality of types of special results, and according to the type of the special results, as the execution mode of the final round, the third execution mode and the inflow of game balls to the specific area than the third execution mode are included. Select one of the fourth execution modes that is easy and has an execution period longer than the third execution mode,
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
When the final round is the third execution mode,
Performing an ending effect of a predetermined length that can be executed over a period from the end of the round immediately before the final round to the end of the special gaming state,
When the final round is the fourth execution mode, the ending effect is executed after the final round ends.

Images